Panasonic DMR-EX79 User manual

DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 1 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Operating Instructions
DVD Recorder
Model No.
DMR-EX79
Region number supported by this
unit
≥The region number of this unit is “4”.
≥The unit will play DVD-Video marked with labels
containing “4” or “ALL”.
Example:
ALL
2
3
4
5
Dear customer
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum
performance and safety, please read these
instructions carefully.
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this
product, please read the instructions completely.
Please keep this manual for future reference.
This DVD recorder is for viewing and recording
free to view channels only, not pay TV or
encrypted channels.
TV Guide system of this DVD recorder does not
support analogue broadcasts.
Trademark of the DVB Digital Video
Broadcasting Project
Declaration of Conformity (22nd October 2008)
No. 5966
About descriptions in these operating
instructions
≥Pages to be referred to are indicated as “> ±±”.
RQT9306-L
GN
until
2009/04/06
Basic
operations
4
2
Quick Start
Guide
Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders
and DVD-Video according to where they are sold.
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 2 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
CAUTION!
THIS PRODUCT UTILIZES A LASER.
USE OF CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS OR
PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN THOSE
SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS
RADIATION EXPOSURE.
DO NOT OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
CLASS 1
LASER PRODUCT
WARNING:
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK OR
PRODUCT DAMAGE,
≥DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN, MOISTURE,
DRIPPING OR SPLASHING AND THAT NO OBJECTS
FILLED WITH LIQUIDS, SUCH AS VASES, SHALL BE
PLACED ON THE APPARATUS.
≥USE ONLY THE RECOMMENDED ACCESSORIES.
≥DO NOT REMOVE THE COVER (OR BACK); THERE ARE
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER
SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
CAUTION!
≥DO NOT INSTALL OR PLACE THIS UNIT IN A BOOKCASE,
BUILT-IN CABINET OR IN ANOTHER CONFINED SPACE.
ENSURE THE UNIT IS WELL VENTILATED. TO PREVENT
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK OR FIRE HAZARD DUE TO
OVERHEATING, ENSURE THAT CURTAINS AND ANY
OTHER MATERIALS DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE
VENTILATION VENTS.
≥DO NOT OBSTRUCT THE UNIT’S VENTILATION OPENINGS
WITH NEWSPAPERS, TABLECLOTHS, CURTAINS, AND
SIMILAR ITEMS.
≥DO NOT PLACE SOURCES OF NAKED FLAMES, SUCH AS
LIGHTED CANDLES, ON THE UNIT.
≥DISPOSE OF BATTERIES IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY
FRIENDLY MANNER.
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
THIS UNIT IS INTENDED FOR USE IN MODERATE CLIMATES.
This product may receive radio interference caused by mobile
telephones during use. If such interference is apparent, please
increase separation between the product and the mobile
telephone.
The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and
easily accessible.
The mains plug of the power supply cord shall remain readily
operable.
To completely disconnect this apparatus from the AC Mains,
disconnect the power supply cord plug from AC receptacle.
WARNING
THE COPYRIGHT ACT 1968 DOES NOT PERMIT THE
UNRESTRICTED USE OF THIS RECORDER TO COPY FILMS,
SOUND RECORDINGS OR BROADCASTS TO ANY
RECORDING MEDIA. THE ACT ONLY PERMITS TO COPY
BROADCASTS FOR PRIVATE AND DOMESTIC PURPOSES IN
LIMITED CIRCUMSTANCES.
PANASONIC DOES NOT AUTHORISE ANY USE OF THIS
RECORDER IN ANY WAY WHICH MAY AMOUNT TO A
BREACH OF ANY LAW OR THE RIGHTS OF ANY OWNER OF
COPYRIGHT IN FILM OR BROADCAST.
RQT9306
2
(Inside of product)
-If you see this symbolInformation on Disposal in other Countries outside the
European Union
This symbol is only valid in the European Union.
If you wish to discard this product, please contact your
local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct
method of disposal.
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 3 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Table of contents
Advanced operations
Notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Advanced recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Recording modes and approximate recording times . . . . . . . . .
When the format confirmation screen is displayed. . . . . . . . . . .
When removing a recorded disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
20
20
21
21
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Advanced timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Using G-CODE system to make timer recordings
(Analogue broadcast only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . .
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the programme from the desired programme type or
category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Searching for the programme in the TV Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
23
24
24
24
24
25
25
26
26
27
Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Operation during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—
DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance . . . . . . . . . . .
To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To edit the group of titles [HDD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
29
29
29
Showing the menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing Music files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
30
31
32
33
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG) . . . .30
Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
46
47
48
49
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Copying still pictures on the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Copying music to HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
About the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying music from a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying music from a USB memory or
CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To update the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
52
Quick Start
Guide
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying SD Video from a video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
53
Setting menus
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 54
HDD and disc management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Deleting all the contents—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first—
Auto-Play Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . . 58
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Basic
operations
Watching analogue and digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . .14
Playing recorded video contents/
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Advanced
operations
Basic operations
Copying
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
59
61
61
62
62
63
64
Editing
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Easy access to various functions —
FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and
TV aspect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10
USB memory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11
Regarding DivX® files, Music files and
still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Media handling (Disc/USB memory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
38
40
42
44
Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Reference
Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO
terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and
receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting a television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
Copying
Quick Start Guide
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing still pictures and music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
67
67
67
68
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Panasonic Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Back Cover
Setting menus
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Getting started
Editing
Reference
Getting started
To play music CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Convenient functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
To pause the TV programme you are watching—
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Linked operations with the TV
(VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
RQT9306
3
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 4 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Included accessories
Getting started
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.
(Product numbers correct as of April 2009. These may be subject to change.)
∏
∏
(N2QAYB000343)
1 Remote control
1
AC mains lead
For use with this unit only. Do not
use it with other equipment.
Also, do not use cords for other
equipment with this unit.
∏
∏
∏
1 RF coaxial cable
2 Batteries
for remote control
1 Audio/Video cable
The remote control information
∫ Batteries
≥Insert the poles (i and j) so to match in the remote control.
∫ Use
Remote control signal sensor
20
R6/LR6, AA
≥Use alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not mix old and new batteries.
≥Do not use different types at the same time.
≥Do not heat or expose to flame.
≥Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.
≥Do not take apart or short circuit.
≥Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.
≥Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.
30
20
30
7 m directly in front of the unit
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.
Remote control operations (> 6)
Safety precautions
Placement
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby
shortening the unit’s service life.
Do not place heavy items on the unit.
Voltage
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit
and cause a fire.
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.
AC mains lead protection
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC
mains lead can cause electric shock.
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric
shock.
RQT9306
4
Foreign matter
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric
shock or malfunction.
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the
power supply and contact your dealer.
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.
Service
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power
source if it is not to be used for a long time.
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 5 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device
that is easily susceptible to damage.
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.
∫ The HDD is a temporary storage device
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.
∫ Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD
Getting started
∫ The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.
∫ Setup precautions
≥Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.
≥Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to
vibration or impact.
≥Do not place on anything that
DO NOT
generates heat like a video cassette
recorder, etc.
≥Do not place in an area often subject to
temperature changes.
This unit
≥Place in an area where condensation
VCR
does not occur. Condensation is a
phenomenon where moisture forms on a
cold surface when there is an extreme
change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal
damage to the unit.
≥Conditions where condensation may occur
– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or
when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly
impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is
subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of
the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.
– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.
– During the rainy season.
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until
condensation is gone.
∫ Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or
breakdown
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,
etc. gets inside the unit.
∫ While operating
≥Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD
may become damaged.)
≥Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or
movement due to rotation is normal.
∫ When moving the unit
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for
a short time.)
∫ HDD recording time remaining
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist
will not increase the amount of time.)
∫ Indemnity concerning recorded content
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).
Unit care
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.
≥Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.
≥Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the
instructions that came with the cloth.
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and
viewing pleasure.
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it
impossible to record or play discs.
Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E
≥This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.
Do not place the unit on
amplifiers or equipment
that may become hot.
DO NOT
The heat can damage the unit.
Note
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the
unit.
RQT9306
5
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 6 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Control reference guide
Quick Start
Guide
Remote control
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.


TV


VOL
DRIVE
SELECT

1 Turn the unit on (> 9)
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 15, 16)
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still
pictures or music (> 18, 25, 43)
5 Basic operations for recording and play
6 Show digital channel information (> 14)/Programme information
within TV Guide screen (> 26)/Show status messages (> 55)
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 28)
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 29, 38)
9 Show OPTION menu (> 27, 38)
– for playing or editing titles and still pictures, etc.
– for searching for programmes
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 28)
; Colour buttons
– for TV Guide operations (> 26)
– for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 29, 32, 34)
– for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 47)
– for deactivating timer programme (> 24)
– for tuning settings (> 59)
< Show on-screen menu (> 54)
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio etc.
= Recording functions
≥[¥ REC] Start recording (> 16)
≥[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 16)
> Transmit the remote control signal
? Television operations (> 65)
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system
(> 16, 26)
A Select analogue channel (> 16)
B Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (> 22)
C Show G-CODE screen (> 23)
D Exit the menu screen
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 17, 26)
F Show FUNCTION MENU Display (> 35)
By using the FUNCTION MENU Display you may access the
main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.
G Return to previous screen
H Create chapter (> 28)
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 28)
J Show Timer Recording screen (> 23)
K Skip the specified time (> 28)

CH
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT


SKIP

CH
ANALOGUE



CH
G-Code
SLOW/SEARCH

STOP
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STATUS






OK
OPTION




CTION MENU
FUN
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE

RETURN



CREATE
AUDIO
DISPLAY CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK


The unit’s display




REC
PLAY



1 Digital broadcast indicator
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.
2 Copying indicator
3 Recording/Playback indicator
Recording indicator
Playback
indicator
REC
REC
PLAY
RQT9306
6
4
5
6
7
8
Recording/Playback
indicator
Timer recording indicator
Disc indicator
Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator
Main display section indicator
Recording mode indicator
PLAY

DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 7 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Main unit






OPEN / CLOSE
REC
 



OPEN / CLOSE
Pull to flip down the front
panel.
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 9)
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of
power.
2 Disc tray (> 13)
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (> 22)
4 Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (> 22)
5 Display (> 6)
6 Open/Close disc tray (> 13)
7
8
9
:
;
<
REC
Quick Start
Guide

USB port (> 13)
Stop (> 16, 28)
Start play (> 15)
Channel select (> 16)
Start recording (> 16)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 16)
Remote control signal sensor
Rear panel terminals (> 8, 66, 67, 68, 69)
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display
“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu)
You can access the main function quickly and easily.
1
1 Playback
Select a function.
Video (> 15, 29)
DivX (> 30)
Picture (> 32)
Music (> 31)
Top Menu (> 15)
Menu (> 15)
Press [OK].
Selectable items are
displayed on the right.
2 Recording
3 Delete
Video (> 18)
Picture (> 43)
Music (> 43)
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Select the recording method.
Timer Recording (> 17, 23)
G-Code Record (> 23)
FUNCTION MENU







Select when you wish to
playback the contents. The
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
screen or menu screen etc.
will be displayed.
Video
Picture
Music
4 Copy
Select the title or file type you
wish to delete. The DELETE
Navigator screen will be
displayed.
Select the copy method.
Video (HDD to DVD) (> 46)
Advanced Copy (> 47)
Copy Music CD (> 52)
Copy Music (> 52)
Copy
TV Guide
5 TV Guide (> 17, 26)
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
6 Others
Playlists (> 40)
Flexible Rec (> 21)
DV Auto Rec (> 22)
HDD Management (> 56)
DVD Management (> 56)
Setup (> 59)
2
7 Drive Select
Select an item.
Select when you wish to
watch or record a
programme. The TV Guide
will be displayed.
Select and execute a
function other than those
above, such as recording or
setting.
Change which drive is used.
HDD
DVD
USB
Press [OK].
Note
If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the
unit on, set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu
(> 62).
RQT9306
7
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 8 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
STEP 1 Connection
≥Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.
≥Refer to “Additional connections” (> 66) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal
When the unit is not to be used for a long time
To save power, unplug it from the household
mains socket. This unit consumes a small
amount of power, even when it is turned off
[approx. 2 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)]
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.
≥If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully
wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB output on this unit.
Required setting “AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 63)
Connecting a television
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
To the aerial
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
RF coaxial cable
(included)
Audio/Video cable
(included)
2
Other connections
(> below, 66)
1 2
3
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
4
Cooling fan
RF
IN
AV1
(TV)
AV4
V4 IN
I
RF
OUT
Aerial cable
OUT
Y
PB
PR
OPTICAL
DIGI AL AUDIO
DIGITAL
UDIO OUT
OU COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
AV2 (EXT)
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AV OUT
This unit’s rear panel
You can enjoy high-quality picture by changing the connection between this unit and your TV as follows.
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology.
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.
[> 36, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Required setting
≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and
Optical” (> 63).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
HDMI IN
Television’s rear panel
HDMI cable
RF
IN
Y
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
PR
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
OUT
HDMI AV OUT
AV1
(TV)
AV4 I N
PB
AV2 ( EXT )
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AV
V OUT
OU
This unit’s
rear panel
Note
RQT9306
8
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 81) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be
output.)
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 9 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings
The features of the power save function when the unit is in
standby mode are as below.
Í
DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
CH
AV
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
Numbered
buttons
Power Save
Power consumption
Startup time
Watching the picture
from the device
connected to AV2
TV
Í
SKIP
STOP
PAGE
CH
“FL Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.
(> 62)
§2 It is possible to startup and start recording within several
seconds.
– Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it
may take time to display the screen.
If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the television
CH
G-Code
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STATUS
TV Aspect
16:9 WIDE TV
C
FUN
OK
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
16:9
TION MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
3,4,2,1
OK
Off
Approx. 15 W
Quick§2
Can do
§1
ANALOGUE
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
On§1
Approx. 2 W
Not Quick
Cannot do
4:3 TV
Quick Start
Guide
Í
Pan & Scan
Letterbox
RETURN
SELECT
AUDIO DISPLAY CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
OK
RETURN
1
2
Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link
functions (> 36), downloading from the television starts.
You can download the tuning positions from the television for
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.
DVB Auto Setup starts.
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital channels.
This takes 5 minutes.
DVB Auto Setup
Scan
CH
1
2
TV : 1
CH 6
Channel Name
ABC
ABC 2
Radio : 0
Type
TV
Data
5
Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect
and press [OK].
≥16:9:
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television
≥Pan & Scan:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture
(> 81).
≥Letterbox:
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style
(> 81).
When television picture appears, set up is complete.
69
Quality
9
9
Data : 1
When clock setting screen is displayed
In step 3, if the clock setting screen appears on the television, set
the clock manually.
This is a 24-hour clock.
Searching...
Clock
RETURN
≥Terrestrial digital channels are stored into logical channel
numbers.
≥Analogue channels are preset at the time of shipping. If you
would like to add new TV channels, set them manually
(> 60).
3
DVB Auto Setup is complete when Region Selection screen
appears.
Press [3, 4] to select your region
and press [OK].
The time information for your region can be obtained.
Region Selection
NSW / ACT
Victoria
Time
0 : 00 : 00
Date
1 .
1 . 2009
Number
0
9
CHANGE
SELECT
Please set the clock.
OK: access RETURN: leave
OK
RETURN
1 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change and press
[3, 4] to change the setting.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
≥You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
2 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
Power Save setting screen appears.
(> Go to step 4)
Queensland
South Australia
Western Australia
Northern Territory
SELECT
Tasmania
OK
RETURN
4
≥If the clock setting screen is displayed (> right)
Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off”
and press [OK] when the “Power
Save” setting menu appears.
To stop partway
Press [RETURN ].
∫ To confirm that stations have been tuned
correctly (> 60)
∫ To restart set up (> 59)
Power Save
On
Off
On : Minimises standby power
consumption, disables Quick
Start function. FL Display is
set to "Automatic".
≥On:
≥Off:
It will go into the Power Save mode when the unit
is in standby condition.
It is possible to start quickly from the standby
mode. (Quick Start mode)
RQT9306
9
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 10 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
HDD and disc information
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
Disc type
Logo
Standard symbol
Hard disk drive (HDD)
[HDD]
–
DVD-RAM
[RAM]
DVD-R
[-R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
(Video only)
DVD-R DL§4
[-R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
Data that can
be recorded
and played
Video
Still picture
Music
Video
Still picture
Rewritable
Play on other
players§1
≤
–
≤
≤
≤
≤
≤
CPRM (> 81)
compatible discs
only.
Video§5
or
Still picture§5
–
≤
≤
–§3
(Either one)
–
Video
–
≤
≤
–§3
(Either one)
–
≤
≤
–§3
(Either one)
–
≤
– (4:3 aspect)
–§3
(Either one)
–
≤
– (4:3 aspect)
–§3
(Either one)
–
≤
– (4:3 aspect)
–§3
(Either one)
–
DVD-RW
Video
≤
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
+R
–
Video
–
[+R] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
–
Video
–
+R DL§4
[+R]DL] before finalisation
[DVD-V] after finalisation
+RW
–
Video
≤
[+RW]
§1 [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Finalisation is needed for playback on other equipment (> 58).
[RAM] can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and
DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.
[-R]DL], [+R]DL] or [+RW] can be played back only on equipment
compatible with these discs.
§2 For further information (> 19, Notes for recording)
§3 The audio selected in “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 62) is
recorded.
§4 [-R]DL] [+R]DL] You cannot directly record to these discs (> right).
§5 [-R] Videos and still pictures cannot be mixed on one disc.
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is
necessary (> 57).
≥[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend
you create top menu (> 58).
≥Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.
For available recording times for different discs under different
recording modes, see “Recording modes and approximate
recording times” (> 20).
≥Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent
you from playing or recording certain discs.
≥Please see specifications (> 80) for compatible disc versions and
recording speeds.
∫ Recording format
This unit records video in the following formats.
DVD Video Recording format [HDD] [RAM]
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit
television broadcasts and so on.
≥You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.
Recording 16:9 Recording both M 1
aspect picture§2 and M 2 for bilingual
broadcasts§2
≤
≤
Copy-once
recording
(CPRM)
≤
Note
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on
secondary audio recording are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this
setting “Off” if high speed copy to [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] is not necessary (The default setting is “On”. > 61).
≥+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with
another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However,
discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
≥You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the
discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the
recording.
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL
disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and
+R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer,
single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is
not enough space on the first layer to record a programme, the
remainder is recorded on the second layer. When playing a title
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between
layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme.
However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit
is switching layers.
DVD-R DL
+R DL
When switching layers:
Video and audio may momentarily cut
DVD-Video format [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
This recording method is the same as commercially available DVDVideo.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be
recorded even if using a CPRM compatible disc.
≥After finalising the disc, you can play the disc on DVD players and
other equipment.
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.
You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar
way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.
≥The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be
recorded.
≥After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the
disc on DVD players and other equipment.
RQT9306
10
Second recordable layer
The available space
First recordable layer
Title 1
(Inner section of
Playback direction
the disc)
Title 2
(Outer section
of the disc)
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 11 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Play-only discs
Logo
Standard symbol
[DVD-V]
DVD-RW (DVD
Video
Recording
format)
[-RW‹VR›]
DVD-R
DVD-R DL
DivX/MP3/WMA/
JPEG
CD
[CD]
–
DivX/MP3/WMA/
JPEG
Video CD
[VCD]
Uses
High quality movie and music discs
DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder
≥You can play programmes that allow One time only recording if they
have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.
≥By formatting (> 57) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video format.
≥It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for recording.
≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivX
≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with music recorded in MP3/WMA
≥DVD-R and DVD-R DL with still pictures recorded in JPEG
Quick Start
Guide
Disc type
DVD-Video
Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW§)
≥CD-R and CD-RW with video recorded in DivX
≥CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3/WMA
≥CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG
≥Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW§)
§ Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
≥Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD
for the type of connected TV
Discs that cannot be played
≥2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm
≥3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring
≥DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit
and not finalised (> 81).
≥Discs recorded with AVCHD format.
≥DVD-Video with a region number other than “4” or “ALL”
≥DVD-Audio
≥Blu-ray, HD DVD
≥DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,
SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, etc.
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.
(≤: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)
TV type
Multi-system TV
PAL TV
NTSC TV
Disc/Titles recorded
on HDD
PAL
NTSC
PAL
NTSC
PAL
NTSC
Yes/No
≤
≤
≤
≤§1 (PAL60)
–
≤§2
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals
the picture will not be shown correctly.
§2 Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (> 63).
≥When playing back a disc or title recorded on the HDD, ensure that
you match the “TV System” setting to the disc or title (PAL or
NTSC) (> 63).
§1
USB memory information
Compatible USB memories
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP protocol:
– USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.
≥USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.
≥USB memories that support bulk only transfer.
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.
≥Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.
≥MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.
≥A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.
Format
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.
≥UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.
≥Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.
≥Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.
Indicated in these instructions by [USB]
Data that can be played or copied
(≤: Possible, –: Impossible)
File format
DivX
MP3/WMA
Still pictures (JPEG)
Playing
≤
≤
≤
Copying to HDD
–
≤
≤
Instructions
You can play DivX files recorded You can play and copy to HDD MP3/ You can play and copy to HDD or DVDwith a computer onto the USB
WMA files recorded with a computer RAM still pictures recorded with a computer
memory (> 30).
onto the USB memory (> 31, 52).
onto the USB memory (> 32, 51).
≥Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.
≥If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc. is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video recorded with the camera to
this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
Note
≥This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.
RQT9306
11
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 12 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Regarding DivX® files, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
DivX
Playable
media
File format
Number of
folders
Number of
files
Support
version
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
DivX
≥Files must have the extension
“.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300
folders
(including the root folder)
Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 200 files
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.
Video
– Number of stream: Up to 1
– Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50
– Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576
– FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps
Audio
– Number of stream: Up to 8
– Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital
– Multi channel: Dolby Digital is possible. MPEG
multi is 2 ch conversion.
MP3/WMA
Playable
media
File format
[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
MP3
≥Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.
WMA (Windows Media-formatted file)
≥Files must have the extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.
Number of
folders
(groups or
albums)
Number of
files (tracks)
Bit rates
(MP3)
Maximum number of folders (groups or albums)
recognizable: 300 folders (groups or albums)
(including the root folder)
Sampling
frequency
(MP3)
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz
For WMA
This unit is compatible with Windows Media Audio 9
(WMA9).
compatible ([HDD] [USB])
ID3 tags
WMA tags
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1:
3000 files (tracks)
32 kbps to 320 kbps
≥If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3/
WMA file, play may not be possible.
Still pictures (JPEG§2)
Playable
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
media
File format
File format: JPEG
≥Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.
Number of
Between 34k34 and 6144k4096
pixels
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of folders
Number of
recognizable: 300 folders (including the root folder)
folders§3
[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 300
folders
Number of
files§3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of files
recognizable§1: 3000 files
[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 3000
files
Not supported
MOTION
JPEG
PROGRESSIVE
JPEG
§1 Total number of recognizable file including MP3, WMA, JPEG,
DivX and other types of files is 4000.
§2 It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.
§3 When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not
display or be playable.
RQT9306
12
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
≥Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended
formats) and Joliet
≥This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVDR DL), but reading or play of the disc may take time if there are a
lot of sessions.
≥Operation may take time to complete when there are many files
(tracks) and/or folders (groups or albums) and some files (tracks)
may not display or be playable.
≥English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.
≥The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is
displayed on a computer.
≥Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files
(tracks) and folders (groups or albums) may not play in the order
you numbered them.
≥This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.
≥Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not be
played.
≥This unit is not compatible with copy-protected, Lossless,
Professional, Voice and Multiple Bit Rate (MBR) for WMA.
≥This unit is not compatible with WMA files protected with digital
rights management (DRM).
[HDD] [RAM]
≥Compatible formats: DCF§4 compliant (Content recorded on a
digital camera, etc.)
§4
Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries
Association (JEITA).
∫ Structure of folders displayed by this unit
You can play Music files (MP3/WMA) and still pictures (JPEG)
on this unit by making folders as shown below. However
depending on the method of writing data (writing software),
play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.
Structure of WMA/MP3
folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in
the order you want to play
them.
e.g. Structure of MP3 folders
Root
001
001 (folder=group)
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
≥The file name extension of
WMA files will be “.wma”.
(file=track)
002
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
004.mp3
003
001.mp3
002.mp3
003.mp3
Order of play
Structures of still picture folders
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Files inside a folder are
displayed in the order they
were updated or taken.
Root
P0000001.jpg
P0000002.jpg
002 Folder
P0000003.jpg
P0000004.jpg
P0000005.jpg
003 Folder
P0000006.jpg
P0000007.jpg
P0000008.jpg
P0000009.jpg
004 Folder
Order of play
P0000010.jpg
P0000011.jpg
P0000012.jpg
[RAM]
The following
can be displayed on this unit.
¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters
§1 Still pictures on the root
Root
1
folder can also be
XXXX.JPG
displayed.
JPEG
§2
Folders can be created
DCIM
on other equipment.
XXXXX
However, these folders
cannot be selected as a
XXXX.JPG
copying destination.
≥If a folder name or file
name has been input using
DCIM
other equipment, the name
XXXXX
may not be displayed
properly or you may not be
XXXX.JPG
able to play or edit the
data.
2
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 13 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Media handling (Disc/USB memory)
Inserting discs
Disc care
∫ Cartridge disc
Insert label-up.
Insert label-up with the arrow
facing in.
Insert fully.
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.
Automatic drive select function
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge set to
“PROTECT” (> 56, Cartridge-protection)]
[DVD-V] [VCD]
≥If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.
≥If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is
automatically selected.
Note
≥When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the disc
from the cartridge.
≥[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc
and turn it over.
≥[RAM] When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the
protect position (> 56), play automatically starts when inserted in
the unit.
Inserting, removing the USB memory
Inserting the USB memory
≥Before inserting any USB memory to
this unit, ensure that the data stored
therein has been backed up.
≥Check the orientation of the USB
connector and insert it straight in.
≥Insert an USB device while the unit is
stopped, so the “USB device” screen is
displayed. Select an item and press
[OK] to switch to the USB-related operations (> 30, 51).
Removing the USB memory
≥Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory
straight out.
≥If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may
be damaged.
∫ How to hold a disc
Do not touch the recorded surface.
DO
DO NOT
∫ Concerning non-cartridge discs
Be careful about scratches and dirt.
∫ If there is dirt or condensation on the disc
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
DO
DO NOT
Quick Start
Guide
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.
∫ Handling precautions
≥Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)
≥Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.
≥Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.
≥Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.
≥Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.
≥Do not use the following discs:
– Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels
(rental discs, etc.).
– Discs that are badly warped or cracked.
– Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart
DO NOT
shapes.
≥Do not place in the following areas:
– In direct sunlight.
– In very dusty or humid areas.
– Near a heater.
– Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature
(condensation can occur).
– Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.
≥To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases
or cartridges when you are not using them.
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no
compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a
problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no
responsibility and offers no compensation for any
subsequent damage caused by such loss.
Examples of causes of such losses are
≥A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD
Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another
company.
≥A disc used as described above and then played again in this
unit.
≥A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer
disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this
unit.
RQT9306
13
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 14 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Watching analogue and digital broadcasts
Basic operations
This DVD recorder has a tuner which allows it to
directly receive and record analogue and digital
terrestrial channels.
Digital channel information
While stopped
Press [STATUS
screen.
] to show the information
OPEN / CLOSE
REC
CH
352 ABC2
ABC News
19:00 - 19:30
Encrypted PG

VOL
DRIVE
SELECT
Signal Quality (> below)
Current time
Station Name
Channel
TV

Progress of the current
programme
Programme
name
CH
AV
No Signal 18:53 All Channels
Change Favourite
info
NOW
Multi Audio
Category
Change the
category
(> 59).
PAGE
Numbered
buttons
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
CH
G-Code
ANALOGUE
CH
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
STATUS
GUIDE
ON MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
CTI
FUN
,,,
OK
ANALOGUE
OK
OPTION
RETURN
CREATE
AUDIO DISPLAY CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
REC
2
3
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information
appears automatically (terrestrial digital channels only).
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
≥Digital channel
REC
You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5:
[0] > [0] > [5]
15:
[0] > [1] > [5]
115:
[1] > [1] > [5]
≥Analogue channel
REC
You can also select the channel with the following steps.
1 Press [ANALOGUE CH].
2 Press the numbered buttons to select the channel.
[0] > [5]
[1] > [5]
[Note] (Digital broadcast only)
≥This unit can receive Standard Definition (SD) broadcasts, but is
unable to receive High Definition (HD) broadcasts.
When High Definition (HD) programmes are broadcast, “Unable to
decode HD” is displayed in the digital channel information
(> right).
≥This unit can receive free cable television but it cannot receive paid
services.
RQT9306
14
The parental ratings level is displayed.
During scrambled broadcasting
(Cannot be viewed with this unit.)
To switch information of the current programme and the next
programme
Press [2, 1].
To show detailed information about the programme
Press [STATUS ] again (only when “info ” is displayed).
To hide the information screen
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.
Signal Quality
No Signal:
No Service:
The digital broadcast signal is not being received.
No broadcasts are currently available.
If “No Signal” is displayed:
≥Adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
≥Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Press [Í] to turn the unit on.
e.g., 5:
15:
Broadcast
time
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
Select the channel
1
Programme is broadcast in multichannel sound (> 55, DVB Multi Audio)
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
STOP
STATUS
CH
Note
You can also select the other channel when the information screen is
displayed by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].
∫ If New Channel Message appears
When a DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings
are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also
cancelled.)
New Channel
A new DVB Channel has been found.
Start DVB Auto-Setup?
Selecting DVB Auto-Setup will delete
all Timer Programmes.
Yes
No
OK
RETURN
The display/hide setting can be changed (> 62, New Channel
Message).
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 15 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs
Refer to “Advanced playback” (> 28) for detail
information.
 OPEN/CLOSE
OPEN / CLOSE
REC

Numbered
buttons
VOL
[VCD]
Press [RETURN
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

CH
AV
STOP
Note
Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [∫] when
you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your
television screen and so on.
ANALOGUE
CH
G-Code
SLOW/SEARCH
PAUSE
PLAY/x1.3
(PLAY)
EXIT
STATUS
CTI
FUN
OK
OPTION
OPTION
ON MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
,,,
OK
].
CH
Basic
operations
DRIVE
SELECT

DRIVE
SELECT
[DVD-V]
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].
≥Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.
≥If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the menu
screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].
[VCD]
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [5]
15:
[1] > [5]
≥To return to the menu screen
[DVD-V]
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].
TV

∫ When a menu screen appears on the television
RETURN
CREATE
RETURN
AUDIO DISPLAY CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
REC
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
1
2
3
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
Press [1] (PLAY).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.
[DVD-V] [VCD]
Play starts from the point specified by the disc.
[CD]
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.
Menu operation for other type of contents
≥DivX (> 30)
≥MP3/WMA (> 31)
≥Still pictures (JPEG) (> 32)
≥Music on HDD (> 34)
≥Music CD (> 34)
Note
≥A title recorded on the HDD with different TV system cannot be
played with the setting as is. A disc with different TV system may
not be also played with the setting as is, only when recording or on
standby for the timer recording.
In those cases, you will be able to playback by changing the “TV
System” settings. But to prevent the failure of the timer recording,
change back the settings before the recording starts. (> 63)
≥Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen,
pictures, sound, etc. to start.
≥The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you
may not always be able to control play as described in these
operating instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.
RQT9306
15
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 16 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Recording television programmes
Refer to “Notes for recording” (> 19) and “Advanced
recording” (> 20) for detail information.
4
 OPEN/CLOSE
Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).
≥Recording modes and approximate recording times (> 20)
OPEN / CLOSE
Recording Mode
REC

DRIVE
SELECT
Numbered
buttons
VOL
CH
AV
STOP
PAUSE
ANALOGUE
CH
G-Code
PLAY/x1.3
ANALOGUE
CH

EXIT
ON MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
CTI
FUN
OK
OPTION
AUDIO DISPLAY
REC
MANUAL SKIP
REC MODE
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the
HDD or DVD drive.
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.
If you selected the DVD drive
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.
≥Press the button again to close the tray.
Press [W X CH] to select the channel.
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,
and then followed by analogue channels.
≥Digital channel
REC
You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.
e.g., 5:
[0] > [0] > [5]
15:
[0] > [1] > [5]
115:
[1] > [1] > [5]
≥Analogue channel
REC
You can also select the channel with the following steps.
1 Press [ANALOGUE CH].
2 Press the numbered buttons to select the channel.
e.g., 5:
15:
RQT9306
16
EP
381:16
SELECT
Press [¥ REC] to start recording.
[0] > [5]
[1] > [5]
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on
disc. Data will not be overwritten.
≥You cannot change the channel or recording mode during
recording.
≥You can record while the unit is in standby for timer
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and
the timer recording will begin.
≥[HDD] [RAM] (Analogue broadcast only) When “Rec for High
Speed Copy” is set to “Off” (> 61), you can change the
audio being received by pressing [AUDIO] during recording.
(Does not affect the recording of audio.)
∫ To pause recording
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
≥When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that
is not being received correctly, the digital channel information
(> 14) is also recorded and remains visible during playback.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connections to this unit.
≥Turn on this unit.
3
191:11
≥[USB] It is not possible to record on a USB memory.
≥Video will not be recorded to DVD-R discs which include JPEG
images.
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
AUDIO
2
95:34
LP
REC
GUIDE
1
47:47
SP
≥To record sound using
LPCM (XP mode only):
Set the “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” to “LPCM” in
the Setup menu (> 62).
CH
CH
SLOW/SEARCH
STATUS
REC
XP
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP

5

DRIVE
SELECT
Remain
CH REC
TV

Rec Mode
Press [;].
Press again to restart recording.
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.
(Title is not split into separate titles.)
∫ To stop recording
Press [∫].
≥From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to
complete recording management information after recording
finishes.
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary
to finalise them (> 58).
In order to play +RW on other players, we recommend you to
create a top menu. (> 58)
To specify a time to stop recording—
One Touch Recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
During recording
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select
the recording time.
≥You can specify up to 4 hours later.
≥The unit display changes as shown below.
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00
^" Counter (cancel)
,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}
≥This does not work during timer recordings (> 17, 23) or while
using Flexible Recording (> 21).
≥The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is
reached.
To cancel
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter
appears.
≥The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording
continues.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 17 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Timer recording
Refer to “Advanced timer recording” (> 23–27) for
detail information.
1
Press [GUIDE].
Wed 13.10.09
TV Guide: Landscape
All Types
Wed 13.10

Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
TV

12:53
All Channels
Time:

DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
CH
Emmerdale
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
CH
G-Code
2
PAUSE
Favourite
Page
Page
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
future programme and press [OK].
≥If “Selection Screen” is displayed, press [3, 4] to select
“Rec.” and press [OK].
PLAY/x1.3
EXIT
Timer
Recording
GUIDE
CTI
FUN
OK
OPTION
AUDIO DISPLAY
Channel
ON MENU
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
Prog. Type
OPTION: Free Word Search
info
Guide Change Display Mode
RETURN
SLOW/SEARCH
STATUS
GUIDE
,,,
OK
+24 hours
SELECT
ANALOGUE
3
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV
programme magazine.
This unit receives the programme information differently according
to where you live.
Note
≥TV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly.
≥If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data
are not updated.
≥Analogue broadcasts can be recorded manually or with the G-CODE
system (> 23).
≥Depending on the region etc., the TV Guide screen may be
different to the actual screen.
DVD 1:58 SP
16:00
Stop
HDD
DVD Mode
17:00
HDD SP
Programme Name
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (> 23, right column, step 3).
Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
I.Y. SOS
00
st
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
Using the TV Guide system to make timer
recordings (Digital broadcast only)
Start
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to
suit the connections to this unit.
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(> 10, 13).
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 64).
Date
All Channels : ARD
Fliege-Die Talkshow
MANUAL SKIP
See also “Notes for recording” (> 19).
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to
record.
HDD 30:24 SP
WED 13.10.09. 12:53:00
1 ARD 15. 10. TUE
RETURN
CREATE
CHAPTER
Remain
Basic
operations
STOP
CH
19:30
20:00
20:30
D.I.Y. SOS
Timer icon
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
Note
≥If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (> 63), the TV Guide
system cannot be used.
≥If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the start
recording time and finish recording time can be set to a margin of
up to 10 minutes. (> 61, Start Recording Time, Finish Recording
Time)
∫ To cancel a timer recording on the TV Guide
screen
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide
and press [OK].
“Selection Screen” appears.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“F” in the TV
Guide disappears.)
Note
≥The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the
aerial input of this unit. It is not possible to receive the data via the
externally connected digital satellite receiver.
∫ To cancel recording when recording has already
begun (> 24)
∫ To release the unit from recording standby
(> 24)
∫ Notes on timer recording (> 25)
RQT9306
17
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 18 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Deleting titles
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete
TV

DRIVE
SELECT
DELETE 
1

DRIVE
SELECT
VOL
CH
AV
PAGE
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
DELETE
INPUT
0 SELECT
SKIP
ANALOGUE
3
CH
G-Code
SLOW/SEARCH
, 
STOP
2
CH
PAUSE

PLAY/x1.3
DELETE Navigator
HDD
EXIT
ON MENU
OK
10.10.
FUNCTION MENU
RETURN
OPTION
RETURN
4
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)
∫ Available disc space after deleting
≥[HDD] [RAM] The space deleted becomes available for recording.
......
Available disc space does
not increase even after
deleting
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
Available disc space
increases after deleting
......
Last title
recorded
Available disc
space
Later recorded
titles
......
Last title
recorded
Available
disc space
This space become available for recording after all the later
recorded titles are deleted.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even
after the contents are deleted.
18
Page 02/02
OPTION
Select
Next
Previous
Next
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
and press [;].
5
6
Press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
The title is deleted.
≥[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the
last recorded title is deleted.
RQT9306
2
You can confirm the titles, that you have selected using the
option menu.
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Title View” (> 38,
step 4).
Available disc space increases after
deleting any of these titles
Deleted
MUSIC
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).
Title
PICTURE
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain
before proceeding.
≥You cannot delete while recording or copying.
Title
VIDEO
RETURN
CREATE
Title
11.10.
Previous
OK
AUDIO DISPLAY CHAPTER MANUAL SKIP
Title
Grouped Titles
CTI
FUN
DIRECT NAVIGATO
R
GUIDE
Title
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Video” and
press [OK].
EXIT
STATUS
,,,
OK
While stopped
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Deleting during play
1
2
While playing
Press [DELETE ¢].
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
The title is deleted.
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 19 ページ
Notes for recording
Broadcast in multi-channel sound (Digital broadcast only):
You can select the audio language when receiving audio in
multi channel broadcast [“Multi Audio” appears at the bottom of
digital channel information display (> 14)].
However, audio cannot be switched after recording.
Bilingual broadcasts (Analogue broadcast only):
[HDD] [RAM]
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.
You can change the audio during playback.
(> 28, Changing audio during play)
When you want to
copy titles in high
speed mode from the
HDD to DVD-R, etc.
Hola
Hallo
Select the audio that you want
to record in “DVB Multi Audio”
in the on-screen menu (> 55).
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Select the main or secondary audio before
recording
(> 62, Bilingual Audio Selection)
However in the following cases, select whether to record the
main or secondary audio:
–Recording sound in LPCM (> 62, Audio
M1
M2
Mode for XP Recording)
Hello
Hallo
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”
(The default setting is “On”. > 61)
About the aspect
when recording a
programme
Hello
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”)
[-R] [-RW‹V›]
If “Aspect for Recording” in the Setup menu is set to
“Automatic” (The default setting is “Automatic” > 61), the
programme will be recorded in the original aspect used when
recording started (including when recording started at a
commercial, etc.). If recorded with a different aspect, select the
correct aspect (“16:9” or “4:3”).
M1
The selected
audio only is
recorded.
Hello
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
If you record from external equipment
– Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external
equipment.
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is
set to “Off”)
The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect.
[+R] [+RW]
The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.
However, in the following case, programme will be recorded in
4:3.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording modes will be
recorded in 4:3 aspect.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.
(The default setting is “On”. > 61)
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X§); however, the audio and aspect settings (> above)
are necessary before recording to the HDD.
§
Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.
Record to the HDD
Basic
operations
Selecting Audio for
Recording
Advanced
operations
Advanced
operations
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.
HDD
When recording the
“One time only
recording”
broadcasts
In the following cases, high speed mode does not work.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW or
8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (> 81) compatible DVD-RAM.
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]

[HDD]
Playing the disc on
other DVD players
(≤: Can do, –: Cannot do)
≥“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They are
deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.
≥Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.
≥You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (> 58).
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them
as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.§
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
Record to DVD-R, etc.
Play on other DVD equipment
CHG
/I

DOUBLE RE-MASTER CD SEQUENTIAL
DISC
1
2
3
4
5



/
/
DISC EXCHANGE
DISC SKIP
OPEN/CLOSE
SEARCH
ENTER
L
VO
AY
TOP
U
MEN
DISPL
RETURN
Finalise
MENU
ON
OFF
DC
IN
9V
OPEN
D
ROUN
A.SUR
E
MOD
TOR
MONI
AT
REPE
MODE
PICTURE
Recording to DVD-R DL
and +R DL
[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (> 58).
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
≥It is not possible to record to both the HDD and the DVD drive simultaneously.
RQT9306
19
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 20 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Advanced recording
Recording modes and approximate recording times
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)
Recording Mode
HDD
(250 GB)
DVD-RAM
Single-sided
Double(4.7 GB)
sided§1
(9.4 GB)
DVD-R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
+R DL§3
(8.5 GB)
2 hours
DVD-R
DVD-RW
+R
+RW
(4.7 GB)
1 hour
XP (High picture
quality recording
mode)
SP (Standard
recording mode)
LP (Long recording
mode)
EP (Extra long
recording mode)§4
FR (Flexible
Recording Mode)§4
55 hours
1 hour
1 hour 45 min.
1 hour 45 min.
110 hours
2 hours
4 hours
2 hours
3 hours 35 min.
3 hours 35 min.
221 hours
4 hours
8 hours
4 hours
7 hours 10 min.
7 hours 10 min.
441 hours
(331 hours§2)
441 hours
maximum
8 hours
(6 hours§2)
8 hours
maximum
16 hours
(12 hours§2)
8 hours
maximum for
one side
8 hours
(6 hours§2)
8 hours
maximum
14 hours 20 min.
(10 hours 45 min.§2)
14 hours 20 min.
Approximately
9 hours with video
quality equivalent to
LP mode.
It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.
When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP ( 6Hours )” in the Setup menu (> 61).
The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6Hours )” than when using “EP ( 8Hours )”.
§3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
§4
When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW
discs.
§1
§2
≥[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP ( 8Hours )” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.
Use “EP ( 6Hours )” mode if playback may be on other equipment.
[HDD]
≥You can record up to 499 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]
≥You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.
[+R] [+RW]
≥You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP ( 8Hours ) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with
the best possible recording quality.
For example with a 90-minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.
≥When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.
REC
When the format confirmation screen is
displayed
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.
Format
This disc is not formatted properly.
Do you want to format the disc now ?
Yes
No
When removing a recorded disc
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc
for play on other equipment.
Finalise
Finalise the disc so that it can be played
on other DVD players.
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible
after finalising. This may take up to min.
Press the REC button to start finalise.
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.
This disc cannot be played on other
DVD players without finalising.
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To format a disc
“Deleting all the contents—Format” (> 57)
∫ To finalise the disc
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.
≥You cannot stop this process once you have started it.
≥If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a
disc name, select “Top Menu” (> 58), “Auto-Play Select” (> 58) or
“Disc Name” (> 56) in “DVD Management” before finalising.
∫ To open the tray without disc finalisation
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.
RQT9306
20
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Flexible Recording
5
When you want to start recording
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”
and press [OK].
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR
mode.
.
≥All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in
the display.
∫ Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these
kinds of situations.
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an
appropriate recording mode difficult
≥When you want to record a long programme with the best picture
quality possible
[HDD]
≥When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly
≥You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording
mode when copying, to fit the disc space.
e.g., Recording a 90-minute programme to disc
To exit the screen without recording
Press [RETURN ].
To stop recording partway
Press [∫].
To show the remaining time
Press [STATUS ].
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.
However there will be 30 minutes
remaining disc space.
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
Necessary space for recording
Preparation
≥Select the channel or the external input to record.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
3
Playing from the beginning of the title you are
recording—Chasing playback
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.
To stop play
Press [∫].
To stop recording
2 seconds after play stops, press [∫].
To stop timer recording
2 seconds after play stops
1 Press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible Rec”
and press [OK].
Flexible Rec
Record in FR mode.
Start
4
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—
Simultaneous rec and play
1
2
8 Hour 00 Min.
8 Hour 00 Min.
Maximum recording time
This is the maximum recording
time in EP ( 8Hours ) mode.
Cancel
Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the
recording time.
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during
recording.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title
and press [OK].
≥There is no sound output while searching forward or
backward.
While stopped
Maximum rec. time
Set rec. time
HDD
REC 0:59
1 DVB
ABC1
LR
≥You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press
[DRIVE SELECT].
4.7GB
DVD-RAM
2
Remaining
time of
recording
Playing while you are recording
If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc
perfectly.
1
e.g., HDD
[HDD] [RAM]
If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.
If you try to record a 90-minute
programme in XP mode, only the first
60 minutes will fit on the disc and the
30-minute balance will not get
recorded.
≥Another disc is necessary.
XP
SP
LP
EP
Advanced
operations
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 21 ページ
To stop play
Press [∫].
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
To stop recording/To stop timer recording
After play stops
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.
2 Press [∫].
3 If the recording stop confirmation screen is displayed, press
[2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].
Note
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
≥You cannot record more than 8 hours.
RQT9306
21
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 22 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Copying from a video cassette recorder
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front
You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.
≥Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.
OPEN / CLOSE
REC
This unit
S VIDEO
DV IN
DV cable
(IEEE 1394,
4-pin)
VIDEO
L/MONO - AUDIO- R
AV3 IN
S Video
cable§1
Audio/Video
cable§2
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at
each break in the images and the playlist is created automatically.
Preparation
1 Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (> left).
2 Turn on the main unit.
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 63).
1
Other video equipment
Turn on the DV equipment, and pause
play at the point you want recording to
start.
The following screen appears.
DV Auto Rec
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.
§1 The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO terminal.
§2 Connect to terminals of the same colour.
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal
≥Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”
in the Setup menu (> 62).
≥When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video
camcorder), you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape
only.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 61) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (> 61) of the Setup menu.
About the aspect when recording a programme (> 19)
Note
≥If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the
recording will start and the copying will stop.
≥If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then
the video quality will be degraded.
Manual recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.
≥When recording bilingual programmes (> 19, Notes for recording)
≥When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 63).
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
≥To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “Input
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (> 54).
≥Check the time on the unit is correct.
1
2
3
While stopped
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the
input channel for the equipment you
have connected.
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select
“AV3”.
Start play on the other equipment.
When you want to start recording
Press [¥ REC].
Recording starts.
To skip unwanted parts
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated to
prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so treated
cannot be recorded using this unit.
RQT9306
22
≥Using Flexible Recording (> 21), you can record the content of a
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.
DV unit is connected.
Record from the DV unit ?
Rec to HDD
Rec to DVD
Cancel
SELECT
OK
RETURN
≥When the screen is not displayed
After performing step 1
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec” and press [OK].
> Go to step 3 (> below)
2
3
4
Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to HDD”
or “Rec to DVD” and press [OK].
Press [REC MODE] to select the
recording mode.
Press [2, 1] to select “Rec.” and
press [OK].
Recording starts.
When recording finishes
The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK] to finish DV automatic
recording.
To stop recording
Press [∫].
Note
≥Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder)
can be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.
≥It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.
≥The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)
≥The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.
≥Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be
input properly.
≥The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will
not be recorded.
≥You cannot record and play simultaneously.
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the
unit off and back on.
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual
recording (> left).
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 23 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Advanced timer recording
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]
≥To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to
suit the connections to this unit.
≥If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording
(> 10, 13).
≥Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 64).
Using G-CODE system to make timer
recordings (Analogue broadcast only)
G-code is a registered trademark of
Gemstar Development Corporation. The
G-CODE system is manufactured under
license from Gemstar Development
Corporation.
Manually programming timer
recordings
1
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Timer
Recording
HDD 30:24 SP
Remain
No. Channel
Date
Start
New Timer Programme
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer
Programme” and press [OK].
Press [1] to move through the items
and change the items with [3, 4].
Timer
Recording
Entering G-CODE numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You
can find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers or magazines.
Channel
Date
Start
Stop
22:00
22:30
Press [G-Code].
DVD 1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP
Remain
TUE 14.10.09. 12:53:00
Press the numbered buttons to enter
the G-CODE number.
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.
Press [OK].
Timer
Recording
Channel
DVD 1:58 SP
HDD 30:24 SP
Remain
TUE 14.10.09. 12:53:00
Date
Start
1 ARD 15. 7. TUE
16:00
Stop
HDD
DVD Mode
17:00
HDD
SP
All Channels : ARD
Programme Name
4
≥Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using
[3, 4, 2, 1] (> right column, step 3).
≥When “-- ---” appears in the “Channel” column, you cannot
set timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired
programme position. After you have entered the information
of a TV station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.
Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
4
≥When “Channel” is selected, you can press the “Blue” button
to change the category [e.g., Free TV, Radio, Favourite
(> 59)] and then press [3, 4] to select the channel you
want to record.
≥Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and Stop
(Finish time) in 30-minute increments.
≥You can also set Channel (Programme position/TV Station
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with
the numbered buttons.
≥Date
[. Date:
Current date up to one month later minus
l ;:
one day
l
Daily timer:
SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI
l
;:
l
a. Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT
Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 29) except when using
Auto Renewal Recording.
≥You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording
drive.
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the
“HDD” (> 24, Relief Recording).
≥You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording
mode.
≥[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (> 24)
ON!)OFF
≥Programme Name
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK].
(> 44, Entering text)
Press [OK].
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is
displayed.
No. Channel
Timer icon
01
TUE 14.10.09. 12:56:00
HDD
Drive
Stop DVD Mode space
17:00 HDD
rogramme
SP
OK
Check to make sure “OK” is
displayed (> 25).
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
No. Channel
ARD
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
Advanced
operations
Programme Name
Input G-Code Number 0-9, and press OK.
3
HDD
DVD Mode
HDD SP
All Channels : ARD
G-Code
Record
2
DVD 1:58 SP
TUE 14.10.09. 12:54:00
1 ARD 15. 7. TUE
Note
HDD 30:24 SP
Remain
The G-CODE system is not supported for digital broadcasts.
1
DVD 1:58 SP
TUE 14.10.09. 12:54:00
Drive
Mode space
HDD
Stop DVD
Timer icon
01
ARD
“F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording
standby has been activated.
TUE 14.10.09. 12:56:00
HDD
Drive
Stop DVD Mode space
22:30 HDD
ogramme
SP
OK
Check to make sure “OK” is
displayed (> 25).
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.
RQT9306
23
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 24 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Advanced timer recording
To cancel recording when recording
has already begun
1
While the unit is on
Press [∫].
Stop Recording
Timer recording in progress.
Stop this timer recording ?
It will be cancelled if you stop.
Stop Recording
Relief Recording
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be
altered to the HDD.
≥The DIRECT NAVIGATOR shows which programmes were reliefrecorded (“ ” is displayed.) (> 29).
≥If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.
Cancel
Auto Renewal Recording
SELECT
OK
2
RETURN
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop
Recording” and press [OK].
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if
you have set a daily or weekly timer recording, the recording
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.
To release the unit from recording
standby
[HDD]
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme
over the old one.
This function can be used only when daily or weekly timer
recording is selected.
1
2
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
3
1
2
4
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press the “Red” button.
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Press [3, 4] to select the programme
and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”
column.
Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press
[OK].
Timer
Recording
≥The timer icon “F” (> 25) disappears from the timer
recording list.
≥You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as
even one timer icon “F” (> 25) remains in the timer
recording list.
≥Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording
standby.
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP
Channel Date
Start
Stop
HDD
DVD
SUN
22:00
22:30
HDD
1 ARD
DVD 1:58 SP
TUE 14.10.09. 12:53:00
All Channels : ARD
Mode RENEW
SP
ON
Programme Name
Note
≥If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto
Renewal Recording takes place.
≥Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.
≥When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may
not be recorded completely.
RQT9306
24
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 25 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Check, change or delete a programme
≥Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Timer
Recording
Remain
HDD 30:24 SP
DVD 1:58 SP
TUE 14.10.09. 12:54:00
No. Channel Date
Start
HDD
Stop DVD
Mode
Drive
space
New Timer Programme
Press OK to store new programme.
OK
Notes on timer recording
≥A disc with different TV system may not be played with the setting
as is, only when recording or on standby for the timer recording.
In this case, you will be able to playback by changing the “TV
System” settings. But to prevent the failure of the timer recording,
change back the settings before the recording starts. (> 63)
≥Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is
turned on/off.
≥Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when
playing.
≥Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal
speed mode (> 45).
≥If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.
≥When you programme successive timer recordings to start
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at
the beginning of the later programmes.
RETURN
A Icons
F
[
Programme
Timer recording standby is activated.
This programme is currently recording.
Programmes are overlapped. Recording of the programme
with the later start time starts when the earlier programme
finishes recording.
You stopped a daily or weekly timer recording. The icon
disappears the next time the timer programme starts
recording.
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.
Recorded
Programme
Not recorded
Recorded
The programme did not complete recording because the disc
is dirty or some other reason.
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording (> 24).
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(Displayed while recording.)
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD
Advanced
operations
The programme was copy-protected so it was not recorded.
X
B Message displayed in the “Drive space” line
OK:
> (Date):
!:
Relief:
Displayed if the recording can fit in the remaining
space.
For recordings made daily or weekly, the display will
show until when recordings can be made (up to a
maximum of one month from the present time) based
on the time remaining on the disc.
It may not be possible to record because:
≥there is not enough space left.
≥the number of possible titles has reached its
maximum.
≥programmes are overlapped.
≥you stopped a daily or weekly timer recording.
Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to the
HDD.
C Channel name, programme name and other
information are displayed.
∫ To change a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (> 23,
right column, step 3)
∫ To delete a programme
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢].
You can also delete a programme with the following steps
1 Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
∫ To exit the timer recording list
Press [PROG/CHECK].
Note
≥Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.
RQT9306
25
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 26 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Advanced timer recording
Operations in the TV Guide system
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and Portrait
view.
Landscape view
∫ When the TV Guide displays “No information
available for analogue channels” or the empty
TV Guide list
Wed 13.10.09
TV Guide: Landscape
Wed 13.10.09
TV Guide: Landscape
All Types
Wed 13.10
12:53
All Types
Wed 13.10
12:53
All Channels
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
All Channels
Time:
The “empty” field
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
Time:
Emmerdale
≥Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.
Set the timer recording manually or with the G-CODE system
(> 23).
Emmerdale
+24 hours
SELECT
RETURN
Prog. Type
Selecting the programme from the
desired programme type or category
Favourite
OPTION: Free Word Search
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Page
Page
This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme
type (e.g. Movies, Sport) or category (e.g. Free TV, Radio).
Portrait view
Wed 13.10.09
TV Guide: Portrait
All Types
Wed 13.10
13 Channel 4+1
13 Channel 4
19:30
20:00
20:55
21:00
22:00
23:00
20:00
20:55
21:00
22:00
23:00
00:05
14 More 4
15 ITV 4
12:53
All Channels
1
16 E4
Hollyoaks
Channel 4 News
3 Minute Wonder
How to Look Good Naked
The Secret Millionaire
Love Trap
+24 hours
SELECT
RETURN
From the desired programme type
Press the “Yellow” button to display
the list of programme type.
From the desired category
Prog. Type
Favourite
OPTION: Free Word Search
info
Guide Change Display Mode
Page
2
Page
∫ To change channels
Landscape view
Press [3, 4] to select a channel.
Portrait view
Press [2, 1] to select a channel.
The TV Guide list appears for this channel.
∫ To view a programme list for another day
3
Press the “Blue” button to display the
list of categories.
Press [3, 4] to select the desired
item.
All Types
All Channels
All Types
Movie
News
Entertainment
S
All Channels
Free TV
Radio
Favourite 1
Press [OK].
≥A list appears with all programmes of the selected item.
≥When you select the Landscape view, the unit displays
programmes in grey that do not belong to the selected
programme type.
≥Jump ahead 24 hours
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead by one day.
≥Jump back 24 hours
Press the “Red” button.
You can only jump back to the current date. Past information
cannot be viewed.
Wed 13.10.09
TV Guide: Landscape
News
Wed 13.10
12:53
All Channels
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...
∫ To browse through the TV Guide list
Time:
Press [W X CH].
∫ To see programme information
Emmerdale
(Programmes with the
symbol)
Press [STATUS ].
Additional information (programme name, programme duration,
broadcast time, description) is available for these programmes.
TV Guide
+24 hours
SELECT
RETURN
Favourite
Page
Page
Tue 14.10.09 19:45
Wed 15.10.
Spending Other People’s Money
ABC ONE, Lifestyle
19:30-20:00. 30min.
A flashy car salesman loses his cool when stingy friend
takes over his wallet. He’s lorced to sell his possessions
at a car boot sale to pay for food.
Note
The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.
This function does not work properly unless the information which
distinguishes the programme type and categories sent from
broadcast stations is correct.
4
TIMER REC
RETURN
Return to List
Press [3, 4] to scroll up and down.
To show other pages
Press [CH W] (Previous) or [X CH] (Next).
Press [STATUS
Prog. Type
OPTION: Free Word Search
info
Guide Change Display Mode
e.g.,
Programme
type, “News” is
selected in
step 2 of
Landscape view.
] again to return to the programme list.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme and press [OK].
When “Timer Recording” screen appears. (> 17, Timer
recording, step 3)
When “Selection Screen” screen appears.
– “View” > 14, Watching analogue and digital broadcasts
– “Rec.” > 17, Timer recording
– “Delete” > Timer recordings can be cancelled.
Press [2, 1] to select ”Yes” and press [OK].
The timer icon disappears.
To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected
the programme type or categories
Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Channels” of the
categories in step 2 above.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9306
26
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 27 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Searching for the programme in the TV
Guide
You can search programmes from the TV Guide based on title
information.
Searching by entering words
By entering words, you can search for programmes from the TV
Guide using the programme information.
1
2
Press [OPTION].
Searching using programme information of titles
recorded to the HDD
[HDD]
You can search for programmes using programme information of
titles recorded to the HDD.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1
During play or while stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to
select “VIDEO”.
Enter the word you would like to
search for and set.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Entry method > 44, Entering text
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
Free Word Search
10.10.
Chantal Show
11.10.
Dolphines
2
Simplified Search
Detailed Search
Detailed Search may result in
many hits, but
search time will be longer.
RETURN
Press [3, 4] to select “Simplified
Search” or “Detailed Search” and
press [OK].
Simplified Search:
It searches the programme names only.
Detailed Search:
It searches all the information on the programmes. It might
take more time to search the desired programme.
2
3
4
OPTION
Page 02/02
Select
Next
Previous
Next
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select “Find Titles”
and press [OK].
Edit
Find Titles
Wed 13.10.09
TV Guide: Portrait
12:53
Search results for “ROSEN”
Wed 13.10
1 ARD
1 ARD
Wed 27.
Fri 29.
4
12:00 - 12:30
15:00 - 15:15
17:00 - 18:00
15:00 - 15:15
2 ZDF
3 RTL
4 SAT1
Rote Rosen
Rote Rosen
Rote Rosen
Rote Rosen
Search results appear.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme and press [OK].
When “Timer Recording” screen appears. (> 17, Timer
recording, step 3)
When “Selection Screen” screen appears.
– “View” > 14, Watching analogue and digital broadcasts
– “Rec.” > 17, Timer recording
– “Delete” > Timer recordings can be cancelled.
Press [2, 1] to select ”Yes” and press [OK].
The timer icon disappears.
To return to the previous screen§
Press [RETURN ].
§
It may return to the TV Guide screen.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Create Group
5
6
7
Press [∫] (Set).
≥When searching using a word other than the title name,
enter a different word. (> 44, Entering text)
Advanced
operations
3
Previous
OK
Press [3, 4] to select “Simplified
Search” or “Detailed Search” and
press [OK].
≥Refer to “Searching for the programme in the TV Guide”
(> left) for more information about “Simplified Search” and
“Detailed Search”.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
programme and press [OK].
When “Timer Recording” screen appears. (> 17, Timer
recording, step 3)
When “Selection Screen” screen appears.
– “View” > 14, Watching analogue and digital broadcasts
– “Rec.” > 17, Timer recording
– “Delete” > Timer recordings can be cancelled.
Press [2, 1] to select ”Yes” and press [OK].
The timer icon disappears.
To return to the previous screen
If you press [RETURN ], the unit may return to the
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9306
27
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 28 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Advanced playback
Operation during play
≥Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.
Stop
Press [∫].
The stopped position is memorized.
Resume play function
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
Stopped position
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is
cleared in some cases.
≥The position is cleared if the tray is opened.
≥[CD] [VCD] and MP3/WMA/DivX : The position
is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Pause
Press [;].
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Search
Press [6] or [5].
Starting
from a
selected
title
Quick
View
[HDD] [RAM]
Slowmotion
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
≥The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥Audio is heard during first level search
forward.
[CD] and MP3/WMA : Audio is heard during all
levels of search.
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of
search.
During play or while paused, press
[:] or [9].
Press the numbered buttons.
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or
track.
≥[HDD]
e.g.,
5: [0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [1] > [5]
≥MP3/WMA and JPEG
e.g.,
5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
≥Other discs
Input a 2-digit number
e.g.,
5: [0] > [5]
15: [1] > [5]
≥This works only when
stopped (the screen on the
right is displayed on the television) with some
discs.
≥[VCD] (with playback control)
If you press the numbered buttons while
stopped (the above screen is displayed on the
television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play
time appears on the unit’s display.)
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
Play speed is quicker than normal.
≥Press again to return to normal speed.
While paused, press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.
≥The unit will pause if slow-motion play is
continued for approximately 5 minutes
(excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).
Frame-by- While paused, press [2] (2;) or
[1] (;1).
frame
Each press shows the next frame.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW]
[DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]
10-minute intervals.)
This automatically disappears after
approximately 5 seconds. To show the screen
again press [TIME SLIP] again.
-5 min
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to
play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
≥DivX : Press [:] to return to the beginning
of the title currently playing.
28
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL]
(This function
does not work
with finalised
discs.)
Skip
RQT9306
1 Press [TIME SLIP].
Skipping
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time
the
and press [OK].
specified
Play skips the specified time.
≥Each time you press [3, 4], the time
time (Time
increases [3] or decreases [4] by
Slip)
1-minute intervals. (Press and hold for
≥Press and hold to change in succession
forward or backward.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
≥[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.
Manual
Skip
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [MANUAL SKIP].
Each time you press, play restarts
approximately 1 minute later.
[-R] [-R]DL]
[-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL]
(This function
does not work
with finalised
discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Create
Chapter
(> 38, Chapter)
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.
≥Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a
chapter.
Changing audio during play
Press [AUDIO].
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD], DivX and analogue broadcast
LR>L>R
^---------------}
HDD
PLAY
LR
e.g., “L R” is selected
[DVD-V]
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack
language (> 54, Soundtrack).
Soundtrack
1 ENG
Digital 3/2.1ch
e.g., English is selected.
Note
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.
≥When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.
≥When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 62).
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting
is “On” > 61).
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 29 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR
All Titles screen
Displays all titles.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
1
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
and press [OK].
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons (All Titles
screen only).
e.g., [HDD]
5:
[0] > [0] > [5]
15:
[0] > [1] > [5]
115: [1] > [1] > [5]
e.g., [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
5:
[0] > [5]
15:
[1] > [5]
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].
(Thumbnail Display only)
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
[
Currently recording.
Title protected.
Title that was not recorded due to recording
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)
Title cannot be played
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is
damaged etc.]
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD
(> 24, Relief Recording)
Title with “One time only recording” restriction (> 81,
CPRM)
Groups of titles ([HDD] only)
t
(NTSC)
(PAL)
Title that was recorded but has not yet been played
([HDD] only)
Title recorded using a different encoding system from
that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.
≥Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit
(> 63).
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
appearance
“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD]
“Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”
1 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed
Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
e.g.,
Table Display
“Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display”
All Titles
“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]
007
All Titles
VIDEO
008
PICTURE
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10. SAT
ARD 18.10. SAT
---
---
---
Previous
OK
RETURN
OPTION
MUSIC
009
Next
Page 02/02
Previous
Select
Next
(in Thumbnail Display)
To sort the titles for easy searching
[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only)
This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback
from many titles.
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
If you select an item other than “No.”
≥The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear after playback
of the selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles
continuously.)
≥Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being
played back.
≥If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, or switch to
another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the sort will be
cancelled.
To play grouped titles [HDD]
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press [OK].
To edit the group of titles [HDD]
Advanced
operations
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them. You
can also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles.
[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title or a group and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary titles.
≥Press [;] to cancel.
2 Press [OPTION].
Create Group
3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press
Release Grouping
[OK].
Create Group:
Press [2, 1] to select “Create” and press [OK].
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.
Release Grouping:
Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK].
≥When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group
are released.
≥When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from
the group.
∫ Regarding the group name
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
10.10.
Chantal Show
Grouped Titles
11.10.
Dolphins
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
2
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
ARD 11.10. SAT
Dolphins
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
ARD 18.10. SAT
Dolphins 2
PICTURE/MUSIC
Grouped Titles screen
Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly timer recording mode
are bundled and displayed as one item.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
10.10.
Chantal Show
Previous
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Grouped Titles
11.10.
Dolphines
VIDEO
Next
Previous
RETURN
OPTION
Page 02/02
Select
Next
Previous
Previous
Next
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Page 01/01
Next
Select
To change the group name
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Title Name” and press [OK].
4 Enter the name. (> 44, Entering text)
≥Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will
not be changed.
MUSIC
2
Page 02/02
Select
PICTURE
Previous
OK
Next
Note
(in Thumbnail Display)
Select the item marked with
bundled titles.
and press [OK] to display the
This function is only available for Videos and not available for music
or still pictures.
RQT9306
29
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 30 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
Showing the menu screen
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
1 Insert the disc.
2 If the disc contains different file types
e.g., [CD]
Disc
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Playing DivX video contents
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official
DivX Certified device that plays DivX video.
You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
1
Show DivX Menu screen.
(> left, Showing the menu screen)
DivX Menu
Folder1 : 0025
CD (DivX)
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
Otherwise,
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
No.
001
002
003
004
Title Name
Tree
ABC.avi
DEF.avi
GHI.avi
JKL.avi
[USB]
1 Insert the USB memory.
Page 001/001
Total Title : 004
OK
RETURN
USB device
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
≥Files are treated as titles.
2
Press [3, 4] to select the title and
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected title.
≥You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [0] > [5]
15:
[0] > [1] > [5]
You can also display this screen with the following steps.
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select”, and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “USB”, and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
∫ Changing the file type to play
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
1 Press [RETURN ] several times to exit the
menu.
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].
FUNCTION MENU
CD(DivX)
Playback
Recording
Divx
Picture
Music
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Note
≥Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to
adjust the aspect through the TV.
≥Successive play is not possible.
≥Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive
or the DVD drive.
Using the tree screen to find a folder
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
1
While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.
3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press
[OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select file type and press
[OK].
DivX Menu
CD (DivX)
Folder
F 1/21
12.02.2009
Image001
Image002
Image003
Image004
Image005
Image006
Image007
Image008
Image009
Image010
DATA1
DATA2
[USB]
OK
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select” and
press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press
[OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press
[OK].
RQT9306
30
RETURN
You cannot select folders
that contain no compatible
files.
2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [OK].
The file list for the folder appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 31 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Regarding DivX VOD content
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:
This DivX® Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.
First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and
submit it during the registration process. [Important: DivX VOD
content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital Rights Management)
system that restricts playback to registered DivX Certified devices. If
you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device, the
message “Authorisation Error.” will be displayed and your content
will not play.]
Learn more at www.divx.com/vod.
Display the unit’s registration code.
(> 64, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)
1
(> 30, Showing the menu screen)
Selected group
G: Group No.
T: Track No. in the group
TOTAL:
Track No./Total tracks in
all groups
DivX Registration
DivX (R) Video On Demand
Tuning
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX
Show MP3&WMA Menu screen.
8 alphanumeric characters
MP3&WMA Menu
CD
G
1
T
1
TOTAL
1/111
Number
0 – 9
Prev.
Next
To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod
SELECT
OK
RETURN
≥After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content
that you purchased using the previous code.
≥If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of
times
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)
When playing this content
≥The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if
– you press [Í].
– you press [∫].
– you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
– you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content
or the start of the content being played.
– timer recording starts on the HDD.
– you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.
≥Resume functions do not work.
2
No.
Group
1 : My favorite
Tree
Total
Track
001 Both Ends Freezing
1
002 Lady Starfish
2
003 Life on Jupiter
3
004 Metal Glue
4
005 Paint It Yellow
5
006 Pyjamamama
6
007 Shrimps from Mars
7
008 Starperson
8
009 Velvet Cuppermine
9
≥Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.
Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [OK].
Play starts on the selected track.
≥“0” indicates the track currently playing.
≥You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
15:
[0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
To stop playing
Press [∫].
To show other pages
Press [:, 9].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Advanced
operations
Setup
Playing Music files
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
You can play MP3/WMA files recorded with a computer onto a DVDR, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
≥You cannot play MP3 or WMA files on the USB memory while
recording or copying.
Using the tree screen to find a group
1
While the file list is displayed
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display
the tree screen.
Selected group No. /Total groups
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.
MP3&WMA Menu
CD
G
8
T
14
TOTAL
40/111
Number
0 – 9
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Tree
MP3 music
G 7/25
001 My favorite
001 Brazilian pops
002 Chinese pops
003 Czech pops
004 Hungarian pops
005 Liner notes
006 Japanese pops
007 Mexican pops
008 Philippine pops
009 Swedish pops
001 Momoko
002 Standard number
001 Piano solo
002 Vocal
You cannot select
groups that contain no
compatible files.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press
[OK].
The file list for the group appears.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
RQT9306
31
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 32 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)
∫ Regarding Album View screen
Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the
shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (> 42).
Playing still pictures
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
≥You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,
DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.
≥You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.
1
Show Album View screen.
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
(> 30, Showing the menu screen)
[HDD] [RAM]
While stopped
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
2 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green”
button to select “PICTURE”.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View
HDD
001
VIDEO
Total 5
Date: 1. 1.2006
MUSIC
---
---
Page 01/01
Previous
Next
Slideshow
OPTION
RETURN
Album View screen
Regarding Album View
screen > right
Total 3
Date: 1. 2.2006
---
OK
PICTURE
---
002
Press OK to show
pictures.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons
Picture and folder protected.
Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
2
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
album and press [OK].
You can also select album with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [1] > [5]
115: [1] > [1] > [5]
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View
HDD
Album Name
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
----
----
----
Previous
OK
RETURN
3
PICTURE
e.g., HDD
103__DVD
0001
Page 001/001
OPTION
Next
Slideshow
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture and press [OK].
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5]
15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]
≥Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.
≥Useful functions during still picture play (> 33)
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View
screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9306
32
[HDD] [RAM]
Grouped by date
002
Total 68
Date: 10.10. 2009
Number of pictures/Shooting date
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]
Album
002
10.10. 09
Total 24
Zoological park
Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name
≥Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC
etc., the information about the recording date may not be
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 33 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Useful functions during still picture play
Start
Slideshow
Slideshow
Setting
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.
While the Album View screen is displayed
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.
2 Press [1] (PLAY).
You can also start Slideshow with the following steps.
While the Album View screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow Setting”and press [OK].
3 Set required settings and press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Set” and then press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [OPTION].
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and press [OK].
Start Slideshow
Slideshow Setting
≥To change the display interval
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval” in step 3.
2 Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (“Normal”, “Long” or “Short”).
≥Repeat Play
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play” in step 3.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off”.
∫ Slideshow with music
You can add music to Slideshow.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Soundtrack” in step 3 (> above).
2 Press [2, 1] to select “On”.
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Select Soundtrack” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of soundtrack and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select an album for soundtrack and press [OK].
Slideshow Setting
Please set the following items.
Display interval
Normal
Repeat Play
On
Soundtrack
On
Select Soundtrack
Album001
Cancel
Set
Set
SELECT
RETURN
≥Music albums on HDD and on USB memory can be used as the slideshow
Soundtrack. However, when selecting still images on USB memory for the slideshow, music albums on the USB
memory cannot be used as the soundtrack. (Even if a music album on USB memory is selected, the music is not
played.)
Rotate RIGHT While playing
Rotate LEFT 1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].
Advanced
operations
Note
OK
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
≥Rotation information will not be stored.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures
– When disc or album is protected
– When played on other equipment
– When copying pictures
– When changing date
Zoom in
Zoom out
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].
Rotate RIGHT
Rotate LEFT
≥To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press [OK].
≥When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.
≥The enlargement information will not be stored.
≥The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than 640 a 480 pixels.
Properties
While playing
Press [STATUS
] twice.
To exit the picture properties screen
Press [STATUS ].
e.g., HDD
18:53:50 11.10.
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006
Date 10. 10. 2009
No.
Zoom in
3/9
Shooting date
RQT9306
33
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 34 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Playing music
To play music CD
Useful functions during music play
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
1
Insert a music CD.
The menu is automatically displayed.
CD
Play Music
Copy Music
Operations during play
Press [∫].
Stop
The stopped position is memorized.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.
≥If [∫] is pressed several times, the position is
cleared.
≥The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.
Pause
Press [;].
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Search
Press [6] or [5].
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Skip
During play or while paused, press [:] or
[9].
Skip to the track you want to play.
≥Each press increases the number of skips.
Repeat
Play
You can select the item which you want to repeat.
SELECT
OK
2
RETURN
Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”
and press [OK].
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database (> 52)
and searches for the title information.
POWERED BY
[HDD]
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
3
Sort
[HDD]
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [5]
15: [1] > [5]
[HDD] [CD]
Copying music to HDD (> 52)
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive
1
2
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
Press [3, 4] to select the album and
press [OK].
You can also select the album with the numbered buttons.
3
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [1] > [5]
115: [1] > [1] > [5]
Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [OK].
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
5:
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]
115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5]
1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Note
≥You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.
RQT9306
34
To cancel the sorted screen
Press [3, 4] to select “No.” and press [OK].
Properties
To play music recorded on HDD
You can change the order of the Album View
alphabetically.
While Album View screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Album Name” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the track and
press [OK].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Playback continues.
While playing
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play Setting”
and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
≥Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.
While Track View screen is displayed
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press
[OK].
≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 35 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Convenient functions
To pause the TV programme you are
watching—Pause Live TV
FUNCTION MENU Display
By using the FUNCTION MENU Display you may access the main
functions quickly and easily.
If “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu,
FUNCTION MENU automatically appears when you turn the power
on. (> 62)
1
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of
disc.
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s
tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is
useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
1
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
2
Video
Picture
Music
Copy
3
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
2
Turn on the television and select the
appropriate AV input to suit the
connections to this unit.
Turn on this unit and press [W X CH]
to select the channel.
When you want to pause the TV programme
Press [;].
Press [3, 4] to select a function and
press [OK].
HDD
4 DVB
ABC
LR
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
Delete
Video
Picture
Music
Copy
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
3
≥If you press [RETURN
screen.
], you can return to the previous
4
When you want to resume
Press [1] (PLAY)
≥The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording mode
(> 20) regardless of the recording mode and the drive
selected before starting saving.
≥At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be
temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending
on the HDD free space.)
Press [3, 4] to select an item and
press [OK].
≥Refer to “Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION
MENU Display” about each function. (> 7)
To exit the FUNCTION MENU Display
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
This icon indicates that Pause Live TV is working. You can
turn off this icon (> 62, Pause Live TV Icon).
Advanced
operations
TV Guide
Operation during Pause Live TV
Search
Press [6, 5].
Pause
Press [;].
Quick View
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).
Slowmotion
While paused, press [6] or
[5].
Stop Pause
Live TV
1 Press [∫].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
and press [OK].
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.
≥Press again to return to the normal speed.
The speed increases up to 5 steps.
≥Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.
Note
≥The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer
recording starts.
≥The Pause Live TV function does not work
– when the clock is not set
– while recording
– while timer recording
≥Audio cannot be switched during resume play.
≥The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is
full or the saving lasts 8 hours.
≥The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after
started.
RQT9306
35
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 36 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using
“HDAVI Control”.
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that
offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV
(VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this
function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable.
See the operating instructions for connected equipment for
operational details.
≥VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions
provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI
CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that
we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other
manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be
guaranteed.
Preparation
1 Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable or to your
receiver using an HDMI cable (> 67).
2 Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 63). (The default setting is “On”.)
3 Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment
(e.g., TV).
≥Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be
used as “HDAVI Control”.
4 Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this
unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI
Control” function works properly.
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat
this procedure.
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
“HDAVI Control 4” is the newest standard (current as of
December, 2008) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible
equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s
conventional HDAVI equipment.
≥Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’
equipment supporting VIERA Link function.
What you can do with “HDAVI Control”
Download from the TV§1
When you connect the unit to a TV for the first time, the station list data etc. are automatically copied from the TV to the unit and the TV stations
are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as on the TV (> 9).
Easy playback
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode and the TV displays
the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§2, [1] (PLAY)§3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [G-Code], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
Power on link
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the corresponding action.
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§2, [1] (PLAY)§3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [G-Code], [PROG/CHECK] etc.
≥[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and MP3/WMA
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.
Power off link
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to standby mode even if
the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed during playback or when the unit set to a timer recording.
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when recording, copying, finalising etc.
≥When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn off.
About the Standby Power Save function§4
Even with “Power Save” set to “Off” (> 64) (Quick Start mode), this unit turns to “Power Save” states (> 9) when Power off link works, so it is
possible to reduce the power consumption while this unit is in standby mode.
≥“Standby Power Save” setting is required to be activated on the TV.
≥When turning this unit on or off without using Power off link function, this unit will not turn to “Power Save” states.
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.
This button is available only when this unit is on.
§3 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents
from where playback started.
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.
§4
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 4”.
§1
§2
Note
≥These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.
≥About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.
RQT9306
36
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 37 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Easy control only with VIERA remote control
If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions.
You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.
Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.
≥The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.
≥The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is finished.
Using the FUNCTION MENU Display to operate this unit§1
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
FUNCTION MENU
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU Display” using the TV remote control.
≥If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
Recording
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote control, and press
[OK].
≥About the FUNCTION MENU Display (> 7, 35).
Delete
Video
Picture
Music
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
OK
RETURN
Pause live TV programme§2
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to
briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.
1
When you want to pause the TV programme
2
≥This unit turns on automatically.
When you want to resume
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.
Advanced
operations
Display the Control Panel (> below) and press [OK].
≥The TV programme resumes.
To stop Pause Live TV
Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed.
(> 35, To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV)
Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit§1
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (> below) and display the Top Menu for DVD-Video.
1 Press [OPTION].
Switch to TV
Displayed when watching with the tuner of
this unit. It will return to the TV picture.
Control Panel
Control Panel is displayed (> below).
FUNCTION MENU
FUNCTION MENU
Top Menu
Menu
FUNCTION MENU Display is displayed
(> above).
Top Menu [DVD-V]
Top menu is displayed (> 15).
Menu [DVD-V]
Menu is displayed (> 15).
Drive Select
Select the HDD or DVD drive
Rotate RIGHT (JPEG)
Rotate LEFT (JPEG)
Rotate the still picture (> 33).
Zoom in (JPEG)
Zoom out (JPEG)
Enlarge or shrink the still picture (> 33).
e,g.,
Control Panel
Drive Select
Note
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu for DVDVideo is displayed and while DVD-Video is being copied.
2 Select an item then press [OK].
∫ Using the Control Panel
Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control.
Select “Control Panel” and press [OK] in step 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit§1” (> above).
Control Panel
The Control Panel is displayed (> right).
≥When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.
Pause
– [3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.
Exit
≥While playing still pictures
Search
Search
– [4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.
Play
Stop
§1
§2
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later.
This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.
∫ When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode
Press [Í] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.
∫ When not using “HDAVI Control”
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (> 63).
RQT9306
37
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 38 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Editing titles/chapters
Editing
[HDD] [RAM]
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalised discs.)
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
1
Chapter
Each section between the division points becomes a chapter.
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
2
During play or while stopped
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”
button to select “VIDEO”.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Chapter
Grouped Titles
VIDEO
PICTURE
MUSIC
Title View screen
008
10.10.
11.10.
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a
playlist (> 40).
“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu (> 61)
“Automatic”:
Detects changes (special mute points like the start and the end of
the programme) in the scene during recording and sets chapter
start points on them automatically.
≥Depending on the programme to be recorded or the Recording
Mode, the chapter start points may not be created correctly.
“5 minutes”:
Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at
approximately 5-minute interval.
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
[HDD]
– Titles: 499
– Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title
(Depends on the state of recording.)
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
– Titles: 99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)
– Chapters: Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)
(Depends on the state of recording.)
Previous
OK
Page 02/02
OPTION
RETURN
Select
Next
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
3
4
Press [OPTION].
Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK].
Enter Title Name
Set up Protection
Note
Refer to “Title
operations”
(> 39).
Cancel Protection
≥Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.
≥You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.
≥Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.
dividing a title etc).
≥[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount
of free space decreases.
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.
Delete
Partial Delete
Properties
Change Thumbnail
Edit
Divide Title
Find Titles
Create Group
Release Grouping
Chapter View
Table Display
Editing titles/chapters and playing
chapters
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded
programmes.
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).
Next
Previous
All Titles
To search programmes on TV Guide
(> 27)
To edit the group of titles [HDD] (> 29)
(> below)
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR
appearance (> 29)
PICTURE/MUSIC
≥Playing still pictures (> 32)
≥To play music recorded on HDD (> 34)
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
5
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
chapter.
To start play > Press [OK].
To edit > Step 6.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View
HDD
VIDEO
Chapter View screen
008 ARD 11.10.
0:31.24
6
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (> above)
Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Delete Chapter
Create Chapter
Combine Chapters
Refer to “Chapter
operations” (> 39).
Title View
≥You can go back to Title View.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
RQT9306
38
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 39 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Title operations
After performing steps 1–4 (> 38)
Delete§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete
titles.
≥Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (> 18).
Properties
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.
≥Press [OK] to exit the screen.
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Enter Title Name
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Set up Protection§
Cancel Protection§
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Partial Delete
[HDD] [RAM]
(> below, For your reference)
Properties
Dinosaur
026
Time
12:19
No.
Date 11.10.2009 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)
Channel ARD
You can give names to recorded titles.
(> 44, Entering text)
≥[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.
1 Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the
section you want to delete.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
007
008
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete
HDD
008
All Tit
VIDEO
PLAY
Start
End
Next
≥Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.
Finish
0:43.21
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
Start
End
- -:- -.- -
- -:- -.- -
OK
Change Thumbnail
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(> below, For your reference)
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title
View.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Change Thumbnail
HDD
1 Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.
2 Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a
thumbnail is shown.
To change the thumbnail
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at
the point you want to change.
VIDEO

008
Change
Finish
0:00.00
Change
- -:- -.- -
Start play and select the image
of a thumbnail.
ENTER
Divide Title
[HDD] [RAM]
(> below, For your reference)
You can divide a title into two.
1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
HDD
008
Divide Title
VIDEO
PLAY
Preview
Editing
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
Divide
To confirm the division point
0:43.21
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays
10 seconds before and after the division point.)
To change the division point
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the
title.
Finish
Note
≥The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (> 81) of the original title.
≥Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.
≥[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.
§
Multiple editing is possible.
Chapter operations
After performing steps 1–6 (> 38)
Delete Chapter§
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM]
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Select “Combine Chapters” (> below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)
Create Chapter
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the
title.
[HDD] [RAM]
(> below, For your reference)
1 Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter
HDD
008
VIDEO
PLAY
Create
≥Repeat this step to divide at other points.
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].
Finish
0:43.21
Combine Chapters
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].
≥The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.
Multiple editing is possible.
For your reference
≥Use Search (> 28), Time Slip (> 28) to find the desired point.
≥To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (> 28) and Frame-by-frame (> 28).
≥To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).
§
RQT9306
39
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 40 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Creating, editing and playing playlists
You can arrange the chapters (> 38) to create a playlist.
Title
Chapter
Title
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
4
Chapter
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”
and press [OK].
Playlists
HDD
Playlist View
--
--
--
--
--
Create
--
Playlist
Chapter
Chapter
5
≥Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to
step 7.
Copying (> 45) a playlist will create a title.
≥Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much
capacity.
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and
source chapters.
≥You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.
[HDD] [RAM]
≥The maximum number of items on a disc:
– Playlists: 99
– Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000
(Depends on the state of recording.)
≥If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the
items entered will not be recorded.
1
2
3
While stopped
6
Delete
Copy
TV Guide
Others
Drive Select
---
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
---
RETURN
Page 001/001
002
OPTION
Page 001/001
Press RETURN to finish.
Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you
want to add to a playlist and press
[OK].
Create
Playlists
HDD
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
002
---
---
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
---
OK
RETURN
7
OPTION
Page 001/001
Press RETURN to finish.
≥You can also create a new chapter from the source title.
Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK]
(> 39, Create Chapter).
Press [2, 1] to select the position to
insert the chapter and press [OK].
Playlists
HDD
Create
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
002
---
---
Source Chapter
001
003
---
---
---
RETURN
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
Chapters in Playlist
-----
8
Page 001/001
Page 001/001
002
Chapters in Playlist
-----
OK
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
HDD Management
Setup
Page 001/001
Press [3] to cancel.
Remain 30:00 SP
Recording
---
OK
FUNCTION MENU
Playback
001 ARD 11.10. SAT
Source Title
001
002
Chapters in Playlist
-----
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [OK].
HDD
Create
Playlists
HDD
Creating playlists
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
≥Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit
the connection to this unit.
≥Turn the unit on.
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded
title to be edited.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).
≥You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while
copying.
≥Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system
currently selected in “TV System” (> 63).
Press [2, 1] to select the source title
and press [4].
Page 001/001
Press RETURN to finish.
≥Press [3] to select other source titles.
≥Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.
Press [RETURN
OK
RETURN
RQT9306
40
].
All the selected scenes become the playlist.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 41 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Playlist operations
Editing and playing playlists/chapters
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)
2
3
4
[HDD] [RAM]
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
playlist.
Properties
[HDD] [RAM]
[-RW‹VR›]
--
5
12.10. SUN 0:30
Create
--
--
Create
Copy§
--
(> 40, Creating playlists, Step 5–8)
[HDD] [RAM]
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press
[OK].
≥The copied playlist becomes the newest
one in the playlist view screen.
Enter
Name
You can give names to playlists.
(> 44, Entering text)
--
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (> 38)
Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM]
Change
Thumbnail
Refer to “Playlist
operations”.
Delete
Enter Name
Properties
Change Thumbnail
§
Chapter View
∫ If you select “Chapter View”
Multiple editing is possible.
Chapter operations
Edit
[HDD] [RAM]
After performing steps 1–7 (> left)
≥Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and
source chapters.
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
chapter.
To start play > Press [OK].
To edit > Step 7.
Add
Chapter
(> 40, Creating playlists, Step 5–7)
Move
Chapter
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position
to insert the chapter and press [OK].
Chapter View screen
Chapter View
(> 39, Change Thumbnail)
[HDD] [RAM]
Create
Copy
Playlists
HDD
Playlists
HDD
002
Move Chapter
01 12.10. SUN 0:11
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30
001
---
001
---
002
---
---
---
---
---
---
0:19.36
0:10.24
0:19.36
0:10.24
7
RETURN
[HDD] [RAM]
≥If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and
press [OK].
6
Date 12.10.2009 TUE
Total 0:30.53
OK
Playlist View screen
Playlist View
01
Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)
is shown.
Properties
≥Press [OK] to
Dinosaur
exit the screen.
No.
10
Chapters 002
To start play > Press [OK].
To edit > Step 5.
Playlists
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press
[OK].
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and
cannot be restored.
Make certain before proceeding.
Editing
1
Delete§
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
≥To show other pages/Multiple editing (> 38)
Previous
Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select
the operation and press [OK].
Create Chapter
Next
OK
Add Chapter
Move Chapter
Page 01/01
Refer to “Chapter
operations”.
Combine Chapters
Create
Chapter
(> 39, Create Chapter)
Combine
Chapters
(> 39, Combine Chapters)
Delete
Chapter§
(> 39, Delete Chapter)
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all
the chapters in it.
Delete Chapter
Playlist View
≥You can go back to Playlist View.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
§
Multiple editing is possible.
RQT9306
41
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 42 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Editing still pictures and music
Album (still picture) and picture operation
Editing still pictures (JPEG)
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]
Delete
Picture§
Delete
Album§
≥You can edit pictures and albums.
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R DL, CD-R/CDRW and USB memory.
≥You cannot edit still pictures recorded on finalised DVD-R.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).
1
2
[HDD]
[-R] (JPEG)
[RAM]
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the
“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.
Change
Date§
Editing an album:
Select the album to be edited and
press [OPTION].
≥When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,
press [OPTION] without selecting album.
1 Select the album which contains the still
picture to edit and press [OK].
2 Select the still pictures to edit and press
[OPTION].
[HDD] [RAM]
You can change the date of the picture.
1 Press [2, 1] to select the item and press
[3, 4] to change.
2 Press [OK].
Enter
Album
Name
You can give names to albums.
(> 44, Entering text)
≥Album names input using this unit may not be
displayed on other equipment.
Set up
If set, this will protect the
picture or album from
Protection§ still
accidental deletion.
Press [2, 1] to
Cancel
Protection§ select “Yes” and
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press
[OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Multiple editing
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
[HDD] [RAM]
Properties
Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]
[-R]DL] [CD]
[USB]
∫ To edit the album
Add
Pictures
Create
Album
(e.g., [HDD])
Start Slideshow
Useful functions during still picture
play (> 33)
Slideshow Setting
[HDD] [RAM]
Add Pictures
Delete Album
Create Album
Change Date
Edit Album
Set up Protection
Copy to DVD
Cancel Protection
VIDEO/MUSIC
Album (still picture) and picture operation
(> right)
∫ To edit still picture
Properties
Album (still picture) and picture
operation (> right)
Change Date
Set up Protection
Copy to
DVD§
Cancel Protection
Album View
DIRECT NAVIGATOR
P
HDD
press [OK].
Album Name
103_
0001
0002
0005
0006
The lock symbol appears
when the still picture or album is protected.
≥Even if the protection setting is used by this
unit to protect an album, the album may be
deleted by another unit.
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is
shown.
≥To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes”
and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album
that contains the still picture you want to
add and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press
[OK].
≥If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:
Select the still picture you want to add and
press [OK].
≥If “Copy all pictures” is selected:
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and
press [OK].
≥If you want to continue copying, select
“Yes” and go to step 2.
Only for “Create Album”
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and
press [OK].
≥If “Yes” is selected:
You can give names to albums. (> 44,
Entering text)
≥If “No” is selected:
The album name is automatically given.
(e.g., [HDD])
Delete Picture
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are
lost and cannot be restored. Make certain
before proceeding.
≥When deleting an album, files other than the
still picture files inside the album will also be
deleted. (This does not apply to folders under
the album concerned.)
≥[-R] Available space does not increase even
after pictures are deleted.
[HDD] [RAM]
Editing a still picture:
3
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
You can go back to Album View.
[HDD]
Copy to
HDD§
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
[RAM]
§
For copy to DVD-RAM or HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
For copy to DVD-R
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &
Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press
[OK].
≥Use blank discs or unfinalised discs on which
JPEG images are recorded with this unit.
Multiple editing is possible.
[Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is
displayed]
Note
RQT9306
42
≥Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change Date”,
“Copy to DVD”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or “Create Album”.
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Editing music
Deleting still pictures and music using
DELETE Navigator
[HDD]
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.
1
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
1
Editing an album:
2
Press [3, 4] to select the album and
press [OPTION].
3
[HDD] [RAM]
4
5
Deleting an album
Editing a track
1 Press [3, 4] to select the album and press
[OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and press
[OPTION].
3
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to
select “MUSIC”.
2
[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]
Press [3, 4] to select the operation
and press [OK].
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album
which contains the still picture or track to
delete and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still
picture or track and press [OK].
Album and track operation (> below)
Enter Album Name
Repeat Play Setting
Useful functions during music play (> 34)
Track View
Sort
VIDEO/PICTURE
You can confirm the item that you have selected using the
option menu.
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View” (> 42,
step 3).
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG)
View” (> 42, step 3).
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View
(Music)” (> left, step 3).
≥Refer to option menu operations for the “Track View (Music)”
(> left, step 3).
≥Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to
play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 29)
≥Playing still pictures (> 32)
> below
∫ To edit the track (Music)
Delete Track
Properties
Album and track operation (> below)
To show other pages [Album (still picture) and still
picture only]
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Enter Track Name
Enter Artist Name
Multiple deleting [Album (still picture) and still picture
only]
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.
Repeat Play Setting
Album View
You can go back to Album View
Useful functions during music play (> 34)
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].
Album and track operation
After performing steps 1-3 (> above)
Delete Album
Delete Track
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents
are lost and cannot be restored. Make
certain before proceeding.
Enter Album Name
Enter Track Name
You can give names to albums and tracks.
(> 44, Entering text)
Enter Artist Name
You can edit the artist name of the track.
(> 44, Entering text)
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item
and press [DELETE ¢].
Deleting a still picture or track
∫ To edit the album (Music)
Delete Album
Press [3, 4] to select “Picture” or
“Music”.
Press [OK].
Editing
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 43 ページ
6
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and
press [OK].
The item is deleted.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Note
≥When the timer recording starts, editing music stops on the way.
RQT9306
43
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 44 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Entering text
2
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.
The maximum number of characters:
[HDD] [RAM]
Title
Playlist
Album of still pictures
Album (CD) ([HDD])
Track (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])
Artist (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])
Disc ([RAM])
§Title name for timer recording
Repeat this step to enter other characters.
Characters
44
40
3
Broadcast
Favourite 1–4
Characters
14
To end partway
Press [RETURN ].
Text is not added.
Show Enter Name screen etc.
Title (timer recording)
Select “Programme Name”. (> 23, Manually programming
timer recordings, step 3)
Free Word Search
Press [OPTION]. (> 27, “Searching by entering words”)
Find Titles
Select “Find Titles”. (> 27, “Searching using programme
information of titles recorded to the HDD”, step 4)
Title
Select “Enter Title Name”. (> 38, step 4)
Playlist
Select “Enter Name”. (> 41, step 5)
Album of still pictures
Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 42, Editing still pictures
(JPEG), step 3)
Album (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 43, Editing music, step 3)
Track (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Track Name”. (> 43, Editing music, step 3)
Artist (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])
Select “Enter Artist Name”. (> 43, Editing music, step 3)
Disc
Select “Disc Name”. (> 56, Providing a name for a disc,
step 1)
Favourite 1–4
Press the “Red” button. (> 59, To change the name of a
Favourite in the “Favourite” column, step 2)
Name field: shows the text you have entered
Enter Name
_
Top Menu Preview
2
3
5
6
7
8
2 A
B
C
a
b
c
 
3 D
E
F
d
e
f
/
4
9
0
*
 %
4 G
H
g
h
i
 $
 Delete
5 J
K
L
j
  @
Add to List
O
m
k
n
l
6 M N
o
[

Name List
7 P
8 T
Q
R
p
q
r
U
V
t
u
v
9 W X
0 . ,
Y
Z
w
x
?
!
"
'
y
:
SELECT
44
1 1

0  9
 Set
RQT9306
≥Using the numbered buttons to enter characters
e.g., entering the letter “R”
5 J K L
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.
7
2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.
7
7
3 Press [OK].
6 M N O
≥To enter a space
Press [DELETE ¢] and press
7 P Q R
[OK].
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
Title
Disc
Note
OK
≥To delete a character
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)
Characters
64 (44§)
64
36
40
40
40
64
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a
character and press [OK].
I
S
Space
RETURN
&
]
_
s
(
{
}
)
-
z
;
\
`
|
^
8 T
Press [∫] (Set).
U
V
∫ To add a name
You can add frequently used names and recall them later.
Maximum number of added names: 20
Maximum number of characters per name: 44
After entering the name (steps 1-2).
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List” and press [OK].
≥You can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Add” and press [OK].
≥Press [RETURN ] to cancel.
∫ To recall an added name
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].
≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled and
press [OK].
∫ To delete an added name
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].
≥You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted.
3 Press [OPTION] to show “Delete Name” and press [OK].
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].
5 Press [RETURN ].
For your reference
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu
after finalisation (> 58). When entering a title name, the name that
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu
Preview” window.
Enter Name
_
Chapter
1_
Top Menu Preview
1 1
2
3
5
6
7
8
9
0
Chapter 1
2 A
B
C
a
b
c
3 D
E
F
d
e
f
/
*
%
4 G
H
I
g
h
i
$
4
&
S
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 45 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Copying titles or playlists
Copying
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult
settings.
Features
Copy direction
HDD > DVD
DVD > HDD
≤
–
High speed mode copy§1
Changing recording mode
Finalise§3
Copying playlists§4
Are chapters maintained?
Are thumbnails maintained?
Recording and Playing while Copying
–
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Automatically finalised
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
–
–
≤
–§5
≤
–§6
–
–
To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (The
default setting is “On”. > 61).
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.
≥When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with high-speed copy.
≥Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.
≥Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.).
≥Titles that contain many deleted segments.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed
)
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode
§2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent
against degradation of picture quality.)
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (> 58).
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.
§5
[RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5 minutes [+R] about 8 minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.
§6 Thumbnails return to the default position.
§7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD
(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation.)
– You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.
– You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (> 19).
– Still pictures or music cannot be played.
Editing
§1
≤
Advanced Copy
Make a copy list and then copy.
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the
way you want.
≤
≤
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)
≤
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with finalised discs.
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.
≤§2
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Can be selected
High speed mode
Normal speed mode
≤
≤
≤
–§5
≤§7
–§6
–
≤§8
(excludes time required to write data management information)
HDD
5X Speed
12X Speed
4X Speed
DVD-RAM
DVD-R§1
DVD-R DL§2
Recording Recorded
Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed
Mode
time
time
time
XP
1
12 min.
5x
5 min. 46 s. 10x
15 min.
4x
hour 1 6 min.
2 min. 30 s. 24x
7 min. 30 s.
8x
SP
10x
LP
3 min.
20x
1 min. 21 s. 44x
3 min. 45 s. 16x
EP (6H)
2 min.
30x
58 s.
62x
2 min. 30 s. 24x
EP (8H)
1 min. 30 s. 40x
48 s.
75x
1 min. 53 s. 32x
4X Speed
DVD-RW§3
Required Speed
time
15 min.
4x
7 min. 30 s.
8x
3 min. 45 s. 16x
2 min. 30 s. 24x
1 min. 57 s. 31x
8X Speed
+R§4
Required Speed
time
8 min. 20 s.
7x
3 min. 45 s. 16x
1 min. 53 s. 32x
4X Speed
+R DL§2
Required Speed
time
15 min.
4x
7 min. 30 s.
8x
3 min. 45 s. 16x
4X Speed
+RW
Required Speed
time
15 min.
4x
7 min. 30 s.
8x
3 min. 45 s. 16x
Copying
∫ Approximate copying times (Max. speed)
≥The above rated value indicates the fastest time and speed required for copying 1 hour title from HDD to each disc in the above list supporting
High-Speed copying. The amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the area on where information is written or
unique feature on the disc.
§1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.
§2 In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL.
§3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.
§4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.
Note
≥When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.
≥Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer) and +R DL
(single-sided, Double Layer)
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal
speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL.
The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted.
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.
– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new
blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent
of up to 4 hours of free space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)
– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to
be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 499 in total.
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (> 10)
Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One
time only recording”
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (> 81) compatible
DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.
≥Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the
HDD.
≥Titles will not be copied if they are protected (> 39).
≥You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only
recording” titles.
≥Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be
registered on the same copying list.
RQT9306
45
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 46 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Copying titles or playlists
4
Before copying
Press [3, 4] to select the title you
want to copy and press [;].
When copying a title with main and secondary audio
≥Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 62) when:
– Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW.
– When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 62)
and you are copying in XP mode.
∫ Speed and recording mode when copying
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following
table.
Rec for High Speed Copy (> 61)
Copy speed
High speed
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Speed Copy” set to “On”. §
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High
Normal speed
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.
When making a copy of multiple titles that
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.
§
In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.
≥[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
≥When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for
Recording” (> 61) do not match.
≥When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
To show other pages
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.
5
6
Press [OK].
After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R and +R DL discs, they become playonly and you can no longer record or edit.
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
Copy starts.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
∫ To stop copying (> 47)
∫ COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and
functions (> 48)
∫ To check the properties of a title and sort COPY
Navigator
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press
[OPTION].
COPY Navigator
HDD
≥Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system
(PAL or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit
cannot be copied.
≥[-R] Video (Titles or playlists) cannot be copied to a disc with still
pictures (JPEG) already recorded on it.
≥[-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video
already recorded on it.
Preparation
≥Insert a disc that you can use for copying (> 10).
≥Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL
are automatically finalised (> 81). After finalising, the discs
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)
When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR.
(However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode,
copy will not be performed.)
1
2
3
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Video (HDD to
DVD)” and press [OK].
COPY Navigator
HDD
Rec time
0:52(SP)
All Titles
Total : 0
No. Channel
001 ARD
002 ZDF
003 AV2
004 ARD
005 AV2
006 ZDF
007 ARD
008 ARD
---
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size:
0MB( 0%)
Date Day Time
26. 9. FRI 13:30
27. 9. SAT 12:15
3. 10. FRI 20:00
3. 10. FRI 22:05
4. 10. SAT 16:10
10.10. FRI 9:25
10.10. FRI 13:30
11.10. SAT 21:00
Page 01/01
OK
RETURN
RQT9306
46
OPTION
Select
Title Name
All Titles
Total : 0
No. Channel
001 ARD
002 ZDF
003 AV2
004 ARD
005 AV2
006 ZDF
007 ARD
008 ARD
---
Note
Rec time
0:52(SP)
Disc Space: 4310MB
Total Size:
0MB( 0%)
Date Day Time
26. 9. FRI 13:30
27. 9. SAT 12:15
3. 10. FRI 20:00
3. 10. FRI 22:05
4. 10. SAT 16:10
10.10. FRI 9:25
10.10. FRI 13:30
11.10. SAT 21:00
Title Name
Properties
Sort
OK
RETURN
Page 01/01
Grouped
Titles
OPTION
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”
and press [OK].
Properties:
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are
shown.
Sort (All Titles screen only):
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to
display titles by No., channel, recording date, day, recording start
time and title name. (You cannot select this item if a title has a check
mark.)
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is
cancelled.
Note
≥When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording
compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the
sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal ( Silent )”
in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 61).
≥If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and
then copy the contents of the list (> 47).
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 47 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
≥When copying to a disc using high speed mode,
Copying using the copying list–
Advanced Copy
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “
“
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.
See also “Before copying” (> 46).
2
3
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [OK].
7
Copy
8
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
Source
HDD
Destination
DVD
HDD DVD
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO
High Speed
3 Create List
RETURN
6
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed
recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or
+RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than
normal.
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal
( Silent )” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup
menu (> 61).
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &
Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press
[OK].
Select the copy direction.
OK
5
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
0
Start Copying
4
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “
” can be
registered.
≥To show other pages (> below)
5 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (> 48)
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” (> 48)
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity:” is not sufficient).
6 Press [2] to confirm.
≥If you are not going to change the registered list, press [4]
several times (> step 7).
≥If “Copy & Finalise” is selected
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no
longer record or edit.
Set the copy direction.
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (> step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to
“DVD”, or vice versa.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
Set the recording mode.
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
(You cannot stop while finalising)
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press
[4] (> step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Register titles and playlists for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (> step 7).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
Copy
Cancel All
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Size:
0MB ( 0%)
1 Copy Direction
No.
HDD DVD
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
VIDEO
High Speed
3 Create List
Page 01/01
RETURN
OPTION
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.
Create List
HDD
All Titles
008
007
VIDEO
0:30(XP)
ARD 10.10. FRI
ARD 11.10. SAT
---
---
When High-speed copying
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are
copied.
When Normal Speed copying
Copies until the point cancelled. However as for titles with “One
time only recording” restriction, only titles that have completely
copied at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are
cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain
on the HDD.
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.
However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to
disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point
canceled are copied.
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining
writable disc space becomes less.
∫ To return to the previous screen
Create copy list.
Start Copying
OK
∫ To stop copying
Copying
1
” or
” can be registered.
Playlists
---
---
Press [RETURN
].
∫ Recording and playing while copying
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)
≥Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.
≥To confirm the current progress
Press [STATUS ].
Note
Previous
OK
RETURN
OPTION
Page 02/02
Next
Select Previous
Next
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press
[;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
≥When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,
the check mark is cancelled.
≥Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)
RQT9306
47
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 48 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Copying titles or playlists
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed
mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed
mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)
[+R]DL]
is displayed, but copy cannot be
performed.
Title with “One time only recording” restriction
(> 19, When recording the “One time only
recording” broadcasts)
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only
recording” restriction after copying. (> 19, When
recording the “One time only recording” broadcasts)
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)
≥Still picture(s) cannot be copied.
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding
(NTSC)
system from that of the TV system currently
(PAL)
selected on the unit.
≥Titles and playlists displaying these marks cannot
be selected.
Data size of each registered item
Size:
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Data size recorded to the copy destination
Size:
0MB
Name of item
No. Size
≥When copying at normal speed, the total
New item (Total=0)
data size will change according to the
recording mode.
≥The total data size shown may be larger
than the sum of the data sizes for each
Create copy list.
registered item, because of data
management information being written to
the copy destination, etc.
[DVD-V] > [HDD]
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD
according to the set time.
≥If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that
portion of title is not recorded.
≥When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 61) is set to “On” and you
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected
in “Aspect for Recording” (> 61) of the Setup menu.
≥Operations and on screen displays during copy are also
recorded.
≥Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.
≥The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.
Preparation
≥Insert the finalised disc (> 13).
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVDVideo”) (> 47, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)
1
≥If you are not going to change the setting (> step 2).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].
≥Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Copy will continue until there is not enough available
recording space on the HDD.
≥Setting the unit to copy according to the set time
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].
(0%)
Page 01/01
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.
Copy
∫ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 6–5 (> 47)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[OK].
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD HDD
Delete All
DVD-Video
Hour
00 Min.
XP
3 Copy Time
Set the time a few minutes
longer.
Delete
Start Copying
Move
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Move:
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (> 47)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
– When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
48
2
2 Copy Mode
Add
Press OK to change the setting.
OK
RETURN
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press
[3, 4] to set the recording time.
6 Press [OK].
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after the
content being played finishes.
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
2 Press [OK].
RQT9306
Set “Copy Time”.
2
≥Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to
include the operation time before play begins.
≥You can also set the recording time with the numbered
buttons.
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start copying.
The disc top menu is displayed.
≥Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising
the disc (> 58).
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 49 ページ
3
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
When the top menu is displayed
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title
you want to start copying, and press
[OK].
My favorite
01/02
01
Chapter 1
02
Chapter 2
03
Chapter 3
04
Chapter 4
05
06
Copying SD Video from a video
equipment
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been
taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, can be
copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)
≥You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this unit.
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.
≥You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is
reached.)
SD Video
VIDEO§
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To stop copying
Press [∫].
You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to stop
copying.
≥If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.
OPEN / CLOSE
REC
HDD
DVD-RAM
USB Cable
Note
§
DVD Video Recording format
Preparation
1 Turn on both this unit and the camera.
2 Connect the camera to this unit with USB cable.
3 Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for
data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.
≥Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.
The display below automatically appears when you connect the
camera to this unit.
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )” and press [OK].
Then go to step 7 on page 47.
USB device
Play Video (DivX)
Copy Video (MPEG2)
Play Pictures (JPEG)
Copy All Pictures (JPEG)
Copy Pictures (JPEG)
Play Music (MP3&WMA)
Copy Music (MP3&WMA)
Update CD database on HDD
SELECT
OK
RETURN
≥SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the copy
list.
≥If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )”
is not displayed.
Copying
≥The screen on the right is recorded at the
beginning.
≥The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of
copy to the end.
≥If play does not begin automatically or if the top
menu does not display automatically, press
[1] (PLAY) to start.
≥Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.
≥If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (> 47,
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy).
RQT9306
49
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 50 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Copying still pictures
≥You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/
CD-RW.
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].
Copying using the copying list
Copy
[HDD] ,-. [RAM]
[HDD] > [-R]
1
2
3
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD HDD
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced
Copy” and press [OK].
1 Copy Direction
6 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (> 51)
7 Press [2] to confirm.
Source
DVD
Destination
HDD
DVD HDD
2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
6
0
≥If you are not going to change the copying direction, press
[4] (> step 5).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.
6 Press [2] to confirm.
Set the copy mode.
≥If you are not going to change the recording mode, press
[4] (> step 6).
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.
4 Press [2] to confirm.
Register still pictures for copy.
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
DVD HDD
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
No.
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
Page 01/01
Start Copying
Create copy list.
∫ To register individual still pictures
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
≥To show other pages (> right)
≥To select another folder (> 51)
4 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (> 51)
5 Press [2] to confirm.
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
≥Only when copying individual still pictures.
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,
select “Folder”.
Set the copy direction.
Copy
50
7
≥If you are not going to change the registered list, press [4]
several times (> step 7).
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (> step 7).
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.
≥Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same list.
RQT9306
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
≥To show other pages (> below)
While stopped
Cancel All
5
No.
2 Copy Mode
Copy
4
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Picture
Picture/Folder
Folder
8
9
New folder
Make a new folder and dub ?
001
002
003
-----
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
New folder
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
For copy to DVD-R
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &
Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press
[OK].
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN
] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Note
≥The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy
list may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still
pictures.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 12), copying will
stop partway through.
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
≥[-R] Video (Titles or playlists) cannot be copied to a disc with still
pictures (JPEG) already recorded on it.
≥[-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video
already recorded on it.
To show other pages
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].
≥You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
∫ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 6–4 (for a still picture) or 6–6
(for a folder) (> 50)
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[OK].
Copying still pictures on the USB
memory
Delete All
Add
Delete
Copying all the still pictures
[USB] > [HDD]
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
1
While stopped
Insert the USB memory (> 13).
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder and press
[;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
2 Press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–3 (> 50, Copying using the copying list)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
– When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the
copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.
∫ To select another folder
After performing step 6–2 (> 50, To register individual still pictures)
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
Create List
Create List
Picture (JPEG)
DVD-RAM
Folder
0001
0002
0003
0004
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
001
002
003
004
---------
\DCIM\100__DVD
100__DVD
101__DVD
102__DVD
103__DVD
Page 001/001
Picture 0012
Next
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All
Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].
Copy All Pictures
3
Copy from
USB
Copy to
HDD
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Copying using the copying list
[USB] > [HDD] [RAM]
While stopped
Insert the USB memory (> 13).
The menu is automatically displayed. (> above)
Page 01/01
Previous
USB device
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
1
Folder
DVD-RAM
103__DVD
The menu is automatically displayed.
File 0012
OK
OK
2
RETURN
RETURN
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures
( JPEG )” and press [OK].
Copy
5:
[0] > [0] > [5]
15: [0] > [1] > [5]
115: [1] > [1] > [5]
≥The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
Source
USB
Destination
HDD
USB HDD
2 Copy Mode
PICTURE High Speed
3 Create List
3
0
Perform steps 4 – 8 on “Copying
using the copying list” (> 50)
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN
Copying
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 51 ページ
] for 3 seconds.
Note
≥Copy Mode is fixed at “PICTURE High Speed”.
≥The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same
at the copy destination.
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 12), copying will
stop partway through.
≥You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.
≥Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the
shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.
RQT9306
51
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 52 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Copying music to HDD
You can store the following formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.
Music CD (CD-DA)
When copying music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal
Gracenote® Database to obtain title information. The album name,
track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you
find the track easily when playing back.
Note
≥While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer
recordings will not proceed.
≥Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc or
USB memory.
≥CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.
MP3/WMA
You can copy MP3 or WMA files from the USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/
DVD-R/DVD-R DL.
About the Gracenote® Database
The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and retrieve
CD title information.
When a CD is inserted or recording from a CD begins, the unit will
automatically search for and obtain information about the inserted
CD.
The Gracenote® Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles
and artist information can be obtained. Please note however that the
newest CD titles, etc. may not be registered yet to the internal
database. This unit has an internal database containing information
for approximately 350,000 album titles.
You can update the internal database (> 53).
If there are CDs with very similar title information, then the incorrect
title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions are found,
then track name, album name and artist name will be blank.
In these cases, enter the CD title information manually, after
recording to the HDD has completed.
Copying music from a USB memory or
CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3/WMA) > [HDD]
You can copy MP3 or WMA files recorded on USB memory or CD-R/
CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL to the HDD by file or folder.
≥One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.
≥The maximum number of albums§ on HDD: 300
The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums§ that
can be recorded will be reduced.
§
Folders with music files (groups) copied to the HDD will be
treated as albums.
1
While stopped
Insert the USB memory or
CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL
(> 13).
The menu is automatically displayed.
e.g., [USB]
Copying music from a CD
[CD] > [HDD]
All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD.
(Cannot record track-by-track.)
≥One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.
≥Audio quality: LPCM
≥The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that
can be recorded will be reduced.
USB device
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
2
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
1
Insert a music CD.
The menu is automatically displayed.
CD
Play Music
Copy Music
SELECT
OK
2
RETURN
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”
and press [OK].
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and
searches for the title information.
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music
( MP3&WMA )” and press [OK].
“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set to
“USB#HDD”, “DVD#HDD” or “CD#HDD” and “MUSIC High
Speed”, respectively.
Register MP3 or WMA files for copy.
≥If you are going to copy a registered list without making any
changes to it (> step 4).
You can register MP3/WMA files or folders.
≥MP3/WMA files and folders cannot be registered on the
same list.
Copy
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
USB HDD
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Track
Track/Folder
No.
Name of item
Size
New item (Total = 0)
2 Copy Mode
MUSIC High Speed
3 Create List
POWERED BY
Page 01/01
Start Copying
OK
RETURN
Create copy list.
OPTION
∫ To register individual MP3/WMA files
3
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and
press [OK].
Recording starts.
To stop recording
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.
≥If the recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be
recorded.
RQT9306
52
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3/WMA file and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
5 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (> 53)
6 Press [2] to confirm.
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 53 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
∫ To register on a folder by folder basis
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Track / Folder” and press [OK].
Copy
USB HDD
Destination Capacity: 4343MB
Track
Track/Folder
No.
∫ Preparing the update data
Name of item
Size
New item (Total=0)
2 Copy Mode
4
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select
all necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
≥The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at
a time.
6 Press [OK].
≥To edit the copying list (> below)
7 Press [2] to confirm.
1 Visit the following website.
http://panasonic.net/pavc/support/gn/
2 Download the data to your USB memory.
≥USB memory 1 GB or larger is required.
≥Refer to the instruction on the website for more information.
∫ Updating the database on this unit
3 Turn on this unit.
4 Insert the USB memory (> 13).
The menu is automatically displayed.
USB device
Press [3, 4] to select “Start
Copying” and press [OK].
≥For individual files only
When specifying an existing folder as the copying
destination
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].
5
To update the database with information on CDs that were recently
released, follow the instructions below.
When creating a new folder as the copying destination
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
2 Enter the folder name (> 44, Entering text).
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK] to start copying.
To stop copying
Press and hold [RETURN
Play Video ( DivX )
Play Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )
Update CD database on HDD
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Update CD database on HDD” and press
[OK].
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Update” and press [OK].
≥Updating takes up to 20 minutes.
≥Do not disconnect the USB memory and the AC mains lead
while updating.
≥Once started, you cannot cancel updating.
A message appears when updating is finished.
7 Press [OK].
Note
] for 3 seconds.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
Note
≥The sequence in which the MP3/WMA files are registered on the
copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.
≥If MP3/WMA files are already contained inside the copy destination
folder, the new MP3/WMA files are recorded following the existing
MP3/WMA files.
∫ To edit the copying list
Select the item in step 3–5 (for a MP3/WMA file) (> 52,
Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/
DVD-R/DVD-R DL) or 3–6 (for a folder) (> above).
1 Press [OPTION].
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press
[OK].
≥Timer recordings do not start while updating.
≥Updating overwrites the internal database forcibly regardless of
whether the data in the USB memory is the latest or not. Make sure
you download the latest version from the website.
≥Some of the CD title information in the database may be deleted
after updating the database.
≥No name will be assigned after copying a CD to HDD if the CD title
information of the CD is not registered in the database. Even if the
CD title information of that CD is added to the database by
updating later, the information will not be assigned to the track/
album already copied on the HDD. (The names will be still blank.)
≥Depending on the situation of Panasonic or Gracenote, upgrading
the Gracenote® Database and providing it through the Web may be
discontinued without notice.
Delete All
Add
Delete
Copying
Cancel All
1 Copy Direction
To update the Gracenote® Database
Delete All:
Delete all items registered on the copying list.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
Add:
Add new items to the copying list.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3/WMA file or folder and press [;].
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all
necessary items.
≥Press [;] again to cancel.
2 Press [OK].
Delete:
Delete the selected items.
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists
After performing steps 1–2 (> 52, Copying music from a USB
memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.
– When a file has been recorded or deleted at the copy source
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,
remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the copy
direction, etc.
Note
≥If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 12), copying
will stop partway through.
RQT9306
53
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 54 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Using on-screen menus/Status message
Setting menus
Audio attribute
Using on-screen menus
LPCM/ Digital/DTS/MPEG:
k (kHz):
b (bit):
ch (channel):
Common procedures
1
Press [DISPLAY].
Disc
Play
Picture
Sound
Other
2
3
4
Soundtrack
1
Digital 2/0 ch
Subtitle
Off
Audio channel
LR
Menu
Item
Setting
≥Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you
cannot select or change.
Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the item and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the setting.
Language
ENG: English
FRA: French
DEU: German
ITA: Italian
ESP: Spanish
NLD: Dutch
SVE: Swedish
NOR: Norwegian
DAN:
POR:
RUS:
JPN:
CHI:
KOR:
MAL:
VIE:
Signal type
Sampling frequency
Number of bits
Number of channels
Danish
Portuguese
Russian
Japanese
Chinese
Korean
Malay
Vietnamese
THA:
POL:
CES:
SLK:
HUN:
FIN:
¢:
Thai
Polish
Czech
Slovak
Hungarian
Finnish
Others
Play menu—Change the play sequence
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that
can be selected will differ.
Repeat Play
≥All
≥Chapter
≥Group
≥PL (Playlist)
≥Title
≥Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].
To clear the on-screen menus
Press [DISPLAY].
≥Track
[CD] [VCD]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
MP3/WMA (except [USB])
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]
[CD] [VCD] and MP3/WMA (except [USB])
Select “Off” to cancel.
Disc menu—Setting the disc content
Soundtrack§
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
The disc’s audio attributes appear.
[DVD-V]
Select the audio and language (> right, Audio attribute,
Language).
DivX
Select the soundtrack number.
≥Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one
audio type.
Subtitle§
[DVD-V]
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (> right,
Language).
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)
Turn the subtitle on/off.
≥Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.
DivX
Turn the subtitle on/off and select “Text” or the subtitle number.
≥“Text” or subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not
multiple subtitles.
Angle§ [DVD-V]
Change the number to select an angle.
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX
(> 28, Changing audio during play)
Source Select (DivX)
≥Automatic:
The constructing method of the DivX contents is
automatically distinguished and output.
≥Interlace:
Select when the disc contents were recorded using interlace.
≥Progressive:
Select when the disc contents were recorded using
progressive.
PBC (Playback control > 81) [VCD]
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using
the menus (> 15) on the disc.
≥The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot
change when there is no recording.
§
Picture menu—Change the picture quality
Playback NR
Reduces noise and picture degradation.
Progressive§ (> 81)
Select “On” to enable progressive output.
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (> above) is set to “On”.]
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit
the type of title being played (> 81, Film and video).
When the output signal is PAL
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)
≥Auto:
Automatically detects the film and video
content, and appropriately converts it.
≥Video:
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is
distorted.
≥Film:
Select this if the edges of the
film content appear jagged or
rough when “Auto” is selected.
However, if the video content
is distorted as shown in the
illustration to the right, then
select “Auto”.
When the output signal is NTSC
≥Auto 1
Automatically detects the film and video
(normal):
content, and appropriately converts it.
≥Auto 2:
In addition to “Auto 1”, automatically detects
film contents with different frame rates and
appropriately converts it.
≥Video:
Select when using “Auto 1” and “Auto 2”, and
the content is distorted.
Input NR
Reduces the noise while recording (Except analogue
channels).
≥Automatic:
Noise reduction only works on picture input from a video
tape.
≥On:
Noise reduction works for input video.
≥Off:
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input signal as it is.
§
RQT9306
54
Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu
(> 63).
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Sound menu—Change the DVB multi audio and
sound effect
DVB Multi Audio
[Digital channel only]
If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the
desired channel before recording.
≥DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or
recording.
≥Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected
will differ.
≥English
≥German
≥Italian
≥French
≥Spanish
≥Original§
§
“Original” is displayed when the original language is available
in a broadcast.
Dialogue Enhancer
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]
[-RW‹VR›] and DivX
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue
easier to hear.
Other menu—Change the display position
Status messages
Press [STATUS
].
The display changes each time you press the button.
Selected drive status/type of disc or USB
memory
The remaining time appears here while stopped.
HDD
REC
PLAY
Recording or play status/input channel
Channel (Analogue broadcast only)
The name of the station (Digital broadcast only).
1 DVB
ABC
LR
Selected audio type
DVD REC
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator
Title number and elapsed time during play/
Recording mode
Available recording time and
recording mode
Date and time
Remain
18:53:50 11.10.
T1
Position
1–5:
The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu moves.
0:05.14 XP
T2
13:50 XP
0:00.10 XP
Title number and elapsed time during recording/
Recording mode
≥When using Pause Live TV
The time when the picture currently displayed on the
television was broadcasted
Play
15:05:13
Live
15:10:46
Current time
No display
Setting menus
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 55 ページ
RQT9306
55
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 56 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
HDD and disc management
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
Common procedures
Setting the protection
[RAM]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
1
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
2
While stopped
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
1
Press [3, 4] to select “Disc
Protection” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
2
FUNCTION MENU
Remain 30:00 SP
HDD
Playback
DVD
Management
Playlists
Flexible Rec
DV Auto Rec
HDD Management
Setup
Recording
Delete
Copy
DVD-RAM
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
Disc Name
TV Guide
Disc Protection
Others
Drive Select
OK
3
OK
Press [3, 4] to select “HDD
Management” or “DVD Management”
and press [OK].
e.g., [RAM]
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (EP)
On
Delete all titles
SELECT
RETURN
RETURN
Format Disc
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is writeprotected.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Disc Name
Disc Protection
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Cartridge-protection
Off
Delete all titles
Format Disc
≥When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and
“Format HDD” are displayed.
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge
≥With the write-protect tab in the protect position,
play automatically starts when inserted in the
unit.
PROTECT
Providing a name for a disc
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can provide a name for each disc.
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> above, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)
1
Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”
and press [OK].
(> 44, Entering text)
≥The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is
displayed on the Top Menu.
≥[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other
equipment after creating top menu.
DVD
Management
DVD-RAM
My favorite
Documentary
Titles
Used
11
0 : 22
Remain 5:38 (
01
Chapter 1
01/02
02
Chapter 2
Note
≥[-R] Once a name is provided to a disc, it is not possible to record
still images to that disc.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
RQT9306
56
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete
all titles
[HDD] [RAM]
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all
titles” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when finished.
Press [OK].
Deleting all the contents—Format
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)
Preparation
≥Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.
≥[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).
Note
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc
even if you have set protection.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)
1
2
3
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
A message appears when formatting is finished.
Note
Note
≥Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be
restored. Make certain before proceeding.
≥Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.
≥Still picture data (JPEG), music data or computer data cannot be
deleted.
≥Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.
Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”
or “Format Disc” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
4
≥Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.
This can render the disc unusable.
Press [OK].
Note
≥When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not be
possible to use it on any other equipment.
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.
≥You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
Setting menus
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 57 ページ
RQT9306
57
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 58 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
HDD and disc management
Note
Selecting the background style—Top
Menu
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVDVideo top menu after finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW]).
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”
and press [OK].
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the
background and press [OK].
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately
four times).
After finalising
≥[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you
can no longer record or edit.
≥[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting
(> 57) although it becomes play-only after finalising.
≥When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.
≥[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›]
about 5-minute§ [+R] about 8-minute§), if
– the titles were directly recorded to the disc.
– the titles were copied using any mode other than the high
speed mode.
§ This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode
of recording.
≥There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters
during play.
Top Menu List
1
2
Display after finalising
Thumbnail
(Still picture)
Title Name
4
5
3
6
Recording/Editing/Entering name
Play on other players
Before
finalising
≤
–
01
7
8
9
≥You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (> 39,
Change Thumbnail)
≥[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images
recorded on them.
After
finalising
–
≤
≥You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s
equipment.
≥If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be
displayed.
≥Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players
due to the condition of the recording.
Selecting whether to show the Top
Menu first—Auto-Play Select
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play
Select” and press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or
“Title 1” and press [OK].
Top Menu:
Title 1:
The top menu appears first.
The disc content is played without displaying
the top menu.
≥[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images
recorded on them.
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment—Finalise
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> above)
before finalising the disc.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)
1
2
3
Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
A message appears when finalising is finished.
Note
RQT9306
58
4
≥You cannot cancel finalising.
≥Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)
≥Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.
This will render the disc unusable.
Press [OK].
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu
[+RW]
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW
disc on other equipment.
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> left)
before creating top menu.
Preparation
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top
Menu” and press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and
press [OK].
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and
press [OK].
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.
Press [OK].
Note
≥You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 59 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Changing the unit’s settings
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.
≥The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.
Common procedures
1
2
3
Press [FUNCTION MENU].
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and
press [OK].
Setup
Tuning
4
5
6
To change the name of a Favourite in the “Favourite”
column
While stopped
Tabs
Disc
Picture
Sound
Display
Connection
Others
Menus
Options
Remote Control
Clock
Setting for Standby
DivX Registration
DVD 1
§
When the station name of the “All Channels” column is highlighted
∫ Auto-Setup Restart
Download from TV
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (> 9) fails for some
reason.
However, if you perform “Auto-Setup Restart”, the order of analogue
channels will change.
When the confirmation screen appears
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
When the Region Selection screen appears on the television
2 Press [3, 4] to select the region and press [OK].
TAB
RETURN
OK
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press the “Red” button.
(> 44, Entering text)
Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a VIERA
Link (HDAVI Control 3 or later) compatible TV with an HDMI cable.
System Update
Initialize
SELECT
3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel
itself. You can still select the channel from the “All Channels”
category.
Press [3, 4] to select the tab and
press [1].
Press [3, 4] to select the menu and
press [OK].
Press [3, 4] to select the option and
press [OK].
You can also use the following method to restart Auto Setup.
When the unit is on and stopped
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
Auto-Setup screen appears.
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password, clock
settings and remote control code return to the factory preset. The
timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
∫ Settings for Digital Channels
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
DVB Manual Tuning
You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto Setup could not
complete successfully.
To return to the previous screen
Press [RETURN ].
To exit the screen
Press [EXIT].
1 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Manual Tuning” and press [OK].
DVB Manual Tuning
Physical Channel
[CH35]
0
Signal Quality
0
Signal Strength
Channel Name
No.
Tuning
578,5 MHz
10
10
Type
New
∫ Favourites Edit
Press the “Green” button to
select the Favourite.
Favourites Editor
All Channels
2 ABC
20 ABC HDTV
Favourite Select
Favourite 1
Add
Add All
SELECT
TV : 0
CH
Radio : 0
Data : 0
START SCAN
OFFSET
RETURN
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set.
3 Press [2, 1] to adjust the frequency.
≥The frequency rises and falls in steps of 0.5 MHz.
≥Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal
quality displays.
[Refer to “Signal Condition” (> 60) for signal quality and signal
strength.]
4 Press [OK] to start scan.
The set channel is displayed in the table.
5 Press [EXIT] and press [W X CH] to check that applicable
channels have been selected.
RETURN
To add channels to a Favourite
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All Channels” column
and press the “Yellow” button.
≥Repeat this step to add other channels.
≥Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the
Favourite. (This function is available only when no channels
have been added to the Favourite.)
2 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
To change the order of channels of a Favourite
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column to
move and press the “Green” button.
3 Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel and press
the “Green” button.
≥Repeat the steps 2 – 3 to move other channels.
4 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.
Add New DVB Channels
You can search for newly added terrestrial digital channels to
receive.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Add New DVB Channels” and press [OK].
The unit starts searching for
Add New DVB Channels
newly available terrestrial
digital channels. This takes
Scan
CH 6
69
CH
Channel Name
Type
Quality
about 5 minutes.
Setting menus
You can create four Favourites of channels for making viewing and
recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the
channel setting itself.
≥Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourite
during timer recording standby.
A message is displayed
when the search is finished.
“No new DVB channels found.” is displayed when no new
channels can be found.
2 Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.
To delete channels on a Favourite
1 Press [1]§.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column and
press the “Yellow” button.
≥Repeat this step to delete other channels.
≥Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the
Favourite.
RQT9306
59
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 60 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Changing the unit’s settings
Signal Condition
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.
Realign the aerial if you are receiving a poor signal.
When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be
selected:
1 Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.
2 Press [W X CH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the
unit’s display.
3 Display the Setup menu again (> 59).
Press [3, 4] to select “Signal
DVB Signal Condition
[CH14] 5 BR3
Condition” and press [OK].
DVB Channel
Signal Quality
0
10
The quality and strength of the
Signal Strength
0
10
signal are shown.
Channel +
RETURN
Channel –
Press [W X CH] to select the
channel.
Signal Quality
Below 2 (display red):
The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the
pictures and sound.
2–5 (display orange):
The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in the
pictures and sound is possible in isolated case.
Over 5 (display green):
Optimum picture and sound quality.
Signal Strength
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,
“10” means signal strength 100%.
If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.
Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.
≥When the signal is weak:
– adjust the position and direction of the aerial.
– adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the
Setup menu (> 59).
– check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly
broadcasting.
∫ Settings for Analogue Channels
Press [OK] to show the following setting.
Manual Tuning
You can delete analogue channels and set the analogue channel
details.
Press [OK] to show Manual Tuning screen.
Manual Tuning
Pos Channel CH
SELECT
OK
RETURN
Delete
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
ARD
ZDF
N3
HR3
BR3
Pos
Channel
CH
Fine Tuning
Mono
Manual
Tuning
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
901
ARD
4
Auto
Off
SELECT
RETURN
RETURN : leave
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].
Pos
CH
Fine Tuning
Mono
60
Pos Channel CH
To delete a programme position
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the
“Red” button.
To change the tuning settings for individual programme
position
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press
[OK].
Channel
RQT9306
4
2
5
8
10
Programme position in the table
(You cannot change the programme position.)
To enter or change the Channel of a TV
station
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name
and press [OK].
If the station name needs a blank space,
select the blank between “Z” and “¢”.
To enter newly available TV stations or
change the CH number of an already tuned
TV station
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to
enter the CH number of the desired TV
station.
Wait a few moments until the desired TV
station has been tuned.
After the desired TV station is tuned, press
[OK].
To obtain the best tuning condition
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning
condition and press [OK].
≥Press [1] to return to “Auto”.
To select the type of sound to be recorded
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo
sound is distorted due to inferior reception
conditions, or if you want to record the normal
(mono) sound during a stereo or bilingual
broadcast, and press [OK].
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 61 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Chapter Creation
Disc
Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (> 38)
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Settings for Playback
[Off]
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password with
the numbered buttons when the password screen is shown.
Do not forget your password.
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)
All DVD-Video can be played.
[8 No Limit]
[1 to 7]
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding
ratings recorded on them.
[0 Lock All]
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.
≥Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)
[Unlock Recorder]
[Change Password]
[Change Level]
[Temporary Unlock]
Soundtrack
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
The original language of each disc will be
selected.
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not
available, subtitles of that language will
automatically appear if available on that disc.
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
Menus
[German]
[French]
[Italian]
[English]
[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
§
[Other ¢¢¢¢]
Enter a code (> 71) with the numbered buttons.
When the selected language is not available on the disc, the
default language is played. There are discs where you can only
switch the language from the menu screen (> 15).
[DVD-V]
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.
≥Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you
make here.
Settings for Recording
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Recording time in EP mode
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode
(> 20, Recording modes and approximate recording times).
[EP ( 6Hours )]
You can record for 6 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
[EP ( 8Hours )]
You can record for 8 hours on an unused
4.7 GB disc.
≥The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6Hours )” than
when using “EP ( 8Hours )”.
Aspect for Recording
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.
[Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original
aspect used when recording started (including
when recording started at a commercial, etc.).
[16:9]
[4:3]
≥When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec
for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded
in the original aspect ratio.
≥In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.
– When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.
High-speed copy does not work for the titles recorded in 16:9 even
if they were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”.
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed
copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X
discs).
[Maximum]
[Normal ( Silent )]
The noise generated by this unit is less
than when “Maximum” is selected, however
the time required for copying will double
(approximately).
Start Recording Time
This function sets the timer recording to start earlier than the TV
Guide time.
[1 min earlier]
[3 min earlier]
[5 min earlier]
[10 min earlier]
[Off]
Finish Recording Time
This function sets the timer recording to stop later than the TV
Guide time.
[1 min later]
[3 min later]
[5 min later]
[10 min later]
[Off]
Picture
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Comb Filter
Select the picture sharpness when recording.
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”
(> 63).
[On] Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting.
[Off] Select it when recording noisy pictures.
Still Mode
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (> 81,
Frames and fields).
[Automatic]
[Field]
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is
selected. (The picture is coarser.)
[Frame]
Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture
is clearer and finer.)
Setting menus
[English]
[Spanish]
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using
high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is restricted
(> below).
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.
This setting is effective when recording from a television
programme or external equipment (including DV equipment), or
when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.
You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press
[On]
[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].
≥The following restrictions are applied to recorded
titles.
– Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set
in “Aspect for Recording” (> left).
– Select the type of audio in advance from
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 62).
– You are no longer able to switch the audio
when watching a programme on an input
channel on the TV connected to this unit.
[Off]
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy
Subtitle
[Automatic]
No chapter start points are set.
Rec for High Speed Copy
Ratings
[English]
[Spanish]
[Original]
[5 minutes]
[Automatic]
Seamless Play
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and
partially deleted titles.
[On] The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does
not work when there are several audio types included on
the playlist and when using Quick View (PLAYa1.3).
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may
change slightly.
[Off] The points where chapters in playlists change are played
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.
RQT9306
61
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 62 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Changing the unit’s settings
Sound
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Dynamic Range Compression
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.
[On]
[Off]
Bilingual Audio Selection
(Analogue broadcast only)
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:
≥Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R, +R DL and +RW.
≥“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.
≥Recording or copying sound in LPCM (> right, “Audio Mode for
XP Recording”).
[M 2]
[M 1]
≥You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.
≥When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (> right).
Digital Audio Output
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through
this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (> 67).
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
PCM Down Conversion
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.
≥Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the settings below if
the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the
disc has copy protection.
[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment cannot process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the
connected equipment can process signals with a
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)
Dolby Digital§
Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2
channels.
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
When connected to equipment with a built-in Dolby
[Bitstream]
Digital decoder.
[PCM]
When connected to equipment without a built-in
Dolby Digital decoder.
DTS§
Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the
signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2
channels.
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
When connected to equipment with a built-in DTS
[Bitstream]
decoder.
[PCM]
When connected to equipment without a built-in
DTS decoder.
MPEG§
§
RQT9306
62
Select how to output the signal.
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2
channels.
≥Not making the proper settings may result in noise.
[Bitstream]
When connected to equipment with a built-in
MPEG decoder.
When connected to equipment without a built-in
[PCM]
MPEG decoder.
Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify
whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats.
Audio Mode for XP Recording
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.
[Dolby Digital] (> 81) [LPCM] (> 81)
≥The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of
normal XP mode recordings.
≥The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.
≥When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> left).
Audio Mode for DV Input
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV
input terminal (> 22).
[Stereo 1] Records audio (L1, R1).
[Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)
subsequent to original recording.
[Mix]
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.
≥When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> left).
Display
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
On-Screen Messages
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information
screen (> 14) disappears automatically.
The length of time the control panel (> 37) is displayed can also
be changed, but “Off” does not work.
[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.)
[7 sec.]
[10 sec.]
[3 sec.]
[5 sec.]
Grey Background
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey
background when tuner reception is weak.
[Off]
[On]
FL Display
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”
(> 64) to “On”.
[Dim]
[Bright]
[Automatic]
The display turns dark during play and disappears
when the unit is turned off. While using this mode,
the standby power consumption can be reduced.
New Channel Message (> 14)
When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be informed
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings
are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.).
[Automatic]
[Off]
The Channel Messages are not shown.
Pause Live TV Icon
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the on-screen
icon while using the Pause Live TV function.
[Off]
[On]
Screen Saver
[On]
When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes
while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is
displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].
[Off]
FUNCTION MENU Display
[On]
[Off]
When the unit is turned on, the FUNCTION MENU will be
displayed. (> 7)
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Connection
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may
not be able to change the settings.
TV Aspect
Set to match the type of television connected.
[16:9]
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.
[Pan & Scan] When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television, side picture is trimmed
for 16:9 picture.
[Letterbox]
When connected to a 4:3 aspect
television. 16:9 picture is shown in
the letterbox style.
Progressive
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television
or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan.
This setting is fixed with “Off” if you set “AV1 Output” to “RGB 1
( without component )” or “RGB 2 ( without component )”.
[On]
[Off]
Note
≥When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube)
or a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is
progressive compatible, progressive output can cause some
flickering. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned about it
(> 54).
≥Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an
incompatible television.
TV System
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting
with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles
on the HDD.
≥Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system
[PAL]
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as
PAL 60.
≥Select to record television programmes and PAL input
from other equipment.
≥[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on
the HDD.
[NTSC] ≥Select when connecting to a NTSC television.
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.
≥Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.
≥[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded
on the HDD.
Note
≥This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can
be recorded onto the HDD.)
≥If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be
used.
≥A title recorded on the HDD with different TV system cannot be
played with the setting as is. A disc with different TV system may
not be also played with the setting as is, only when recording or
on standby for the timer recording.
In those cases, you will be able to playback by changing the “TV
System” settings. But to prevent the failure of the timer recording,
change back the settings before the recording starts.
To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)
While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the
main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
HDMI Settings
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
HDMI Video Format
You can only select items compatible with the connected
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may
be improved by changing the setting.
≥To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need
to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this
unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must
also be 1080p compatible.
[576i/480i] [576p/480p]
[720p]
[1080i]
[1080p]
When setting video output to “1080p”, we
recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that
have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and
are less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion
etc.
[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,
720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).
Aspect for 4:3 Video
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how
to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.
[4:3]
Picture output expands left or right.
[16:9]
Picture is output as original aspect with
side panels.
Digital Audio Output
[HDMI and Optical]
[Optical Only]
Select when this unit is connected to an
amplifier with an optical digital audio
cable and connected to a TV with an
HDMI cable and you want to enjoy the
highest quality of audio from discs
(> 67).
VIERA Link
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.
[On]
[Off]
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.
AV1 Output
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.
Select “Video ( with component )” or “S Video ( with component )”
for component output (progressive output).
If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select
“RGB 1 ( without component )” or “RGB 2 ( without component )”.
[Video ( with component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.
[S Video ( with component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video
signal.
[RGB 1 ( without component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If
you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch
to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.
[RGB 2 ( without component )]
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If
you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only
when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.
Setting menus
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 63 ページ
AV2 Input
Set according to the output signal of the connected equipment.
[Video]
[S Video]
RQT9306
63
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 64 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Changing the unit’s settings
Setting for Standby
Others
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Power Save
Remote Control
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products
close together.
[DVD 2]
[DVD 3]
[DVD 1]
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.
Tuning
Disc
Picture
The unit’s remote control code
Change the code on the remote
control to match the main unit’s
(> step 2).
Note
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main
unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1
(> step 2).
Clock
This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital
broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a
day. However, if the time is not set correctly, use the settings listed
in the method below.
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press
[OK].
e.g., This screen appears
while receiving a digital
broadcast.
Off
Time
15 : 45 : 39
[6 hours]
[2 hours]
[4 hours]
[Off]
The unit will not automatically turn off.
DivX Registration
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Videoon-Demand (VOD) content (> 31).
System Update
In order to update this unit’s software, the TV Guide download, and
to support system changes made by broadcasts, this unit
periodically performs software updates.
Press [OK] to show the following settings.
≥Update data and TV Guide download information are sent by an
unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates,
you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.
≥An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update
is in progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display. You cannot
operate the unit until the update is complete. Removing the AC
mains lead while the update is in progress may damage the unit.
≥TV Guide download will take approximately 60 minutes. While
the TV Guide download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on the
unit’s display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by
switching on the unit.
TV Guide Download in Standby
[On]
When you set this unit to standby mode, TV Guide data is
downloaded automatically.
[Off]
Software Update in Standby
Clock
Automatic
This sets to Quick Start Mode.
Set the time to automatically turn the unit off.
After the unit has finished operating, the unit will be turned off
once the set time has passed.
Press “” and “OK” together
for more than 5 seconds on the remote
control.
∫ When the following indicator appears on the
unit’s display
[Off]
Auto Standby
Remote Control
To change the code on the remote control
2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button
([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.
3 Press [OK].
Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned
to standby (> 80).
≥Refer to the chart for the Power Save function features (> 9)
when the unit is turned off.
1 Press [3, 4] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”)
and press [OK].
Setup
[On]
[On]
Region Selection
Queensland
Date
When you set this unit to standby mode, software
updates are downloaded automatically.
[Off]
11 . 12 . 2009
TV Guide/Software search period
Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download
and updates when the unit is set to standby mode. This can only
be set when “TV Guide Download in Standby” and “Software
Update in Standby” is set to “On”.
≥If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have
selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.
The unit will give priority to searching for TV
[Automatic]
Guide download and update data at midnight.
[02:00–06:00] [06:00–10:00] [10:00–14:00]
[14:00–18:00] [18:00–22:00] [22:00–02:00]
Please set the clock.
OK: access RETURN: leave
CHANGE
OK
RETURN
2 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.
The items change as follows:
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J
Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.
(Monthly accuracy +/– 15 seconds.)
3 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.
4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.
The clock starts.
Software Update Search Now
Start the search for new software manually.
A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn
your unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of
data. A message shows that the update has finished.
Note
If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when
“Automatic” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic
time correction function checks the time and if necessary it is
adjusted several times every day.
∫ To change the region
1 Press [3, 4] to set “Automatic” to “On” and press [OK] in step
1.
2 Press [3, 4] to select the correct region and press [OK].
Auto clock setting starts. This takes a few minutes.
“Automatic clock setting completed.” screen is displayed.
3 Press [RETURN ] to exit the screen.
≥If applicable update data is found, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”
and press [OK].
Initialize
≥Press [OK] to show the following settings.
Shipping Condition§1§2
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password, and
clock settings return to the factory preset.
[Yes]
[No]
Default Settings§1§2
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings,
region settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.
[Yes]
[No]
RQT9306
64
§1
§2
The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.
Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 65 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Other Settings
2
Television operation
Test by turning on the television and
changing channels.
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the
television channel and change the television volume.
Turn TV on/off
Í
DRIVE
SELECT
Input select
1
TV
VOL
Channel
Select
CH
AV
1 2 3
4 5 6
8 9
PAGE
Volume
CH
Child Lock
ANALOGUE
Point the remote control at the
television
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code
with the numbered buttons.
e.g.,
[0] > [1]
01:
[1] > [0]
10:
Manufacturer and Code No.
Brand
Panasonic
AIWA
AKAI
BEJING
BEKO
Note
≥If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the
one that allows correct operation.
BENQ
Code
01/02/03/04
35
27/30
33
05/71/72/73/
74
58/59
Brand
BP
BRANDT
BUSH
CENTREX
CHANGHONG
CURTIS
DAEWOO
DESMET
DUAL
ELEMIS
FERGUSON
FINLUX
FISHER
FUJITSU
FUNAI
09
10/15
05
66
69
05
64/65
05
05
05
10/34
61
21
53
63/67
NORDMENDE
OLEVIA
ONWA
ORION
PEONY
PHILCO
PHILIPS
PHONOLA
PIONEER
PROVIEW
PYE
RADIOLA
SABA
SALORA
SAMSUNG
GOLDSTAR
GOODMANS
GRADIENTE
GRUNDIG
05/50/51
05
36
09
SANSUI
SANYO
SCHNEIDER
SEG
HIKONA
HITACHI
SELECO
SHARP
INNO HIT
IRRADIO
ITT
JINGXING
52
05/22/23/40/
41
05
30
25
49
SIEMENS
SINUDYNE
SONY
TCL
JVC
17/30/39/70
TELEFUNKEN
KDS
KOLIN
KONKA
LG
LOEWE
52
45
62
05/50/51
07/46
MAG
52
TEVION
TEX ONDA
THOMSON
TOSHIBA
WHITE
WESTINGHOUSE
YAMAHA
18/41
METZ
MITSUBISHI
MIVAR
NEC
NOBLEX
NOKIA
Code
05/28
05/19/20/47
24
36
33
25/26/27/
60/61
10
45
30/39/70
05
49/69
41/48/64
05/06/46
05
37/38
52
05
05
10
26
32/42/43/
65/68
05
21/54/55/56
05/29/30
05/69/75/
76/77/78
05/25
18
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.
Press and hold [OK] and
[RETURN ]
simultaneously until “X
HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.
To cancel the Child Lock
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN
HOLD” disappears.
] simultaneously until “X
Setting menus
Í
≥Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows
correct operation.
≥If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for
your television does not allow control of your television, this
remote control is not compatible with your television.
09
05
08
31/33/66/
67/69
10/11/12/
13/14
52
52
10/15/44
16/57
05
RQT9306
65
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 66 ページ
Additional connections
Connecting a television with S VIDEO
terminals
Connecting a television with
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
≥Supplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).
Television’s rear panel
Y
AUDIO IN
R
L
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
PB
PR
Television’s rear panel
Component
video cable
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO
IN
R
L
IN
Audio
cable
RF
IN
Y
Audio cable
PB
RF
OUT
OPTICAL
OUT
S Video cable
AV1
(TV)
AV4 I N
Reference
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
PR
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
R-AUDIO-L
AV2 ( EXT )
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AV4 I N
OUT
This unit’s rear panel
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
This unit’s rear panel
AV OU
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or
progressive output (> 81) and provide a purer picture than the S
VIDEO OUT terminal.
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
≥Supplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).
Required setting
“Progressive” setting in the Setup menu (> 63)
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)
Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is
progressive compatible. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned
about it. This is the same for multi system televisions using PAL
mode.
CRT
DO NOT
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
This unit
RQT9306
66
Progressive output
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 67 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Connecting an amplifier with a digital
input terminal
Connecting a stereo amplifier
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
≥Supplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).
≥To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.
Required setting
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (> 62)
≥When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (> 63).
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the
television.
≥Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.
≥You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.
AUDIO IN
R L
Audio cable
OPTICAL IN
OUT
Insert fully, with
this side facing
up.
Optical digital audio cable
Do not bend sharply when
connecting.
AV4 I N
Amplifier’s rear panel
Amplifier’s rear panel
Y
OUT
AV1
(TV)
PR
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
This unit’s rear panel
AV4 I N
This unit’s rear panel
OUT
R-AUDIO-L
PB
AV2 (EXT )
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.
≥Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.
≥Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).
≥When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.
[> 36, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]
≥Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.
≥It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.
Recommended part number:
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.
Television’s rear panel
Required setting
≥Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and
Optical” (> 63).
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)
HDMI IN
HDMI cable
HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
Receiver’s rear panel
RF
IN
Y
OPTICAL
PR
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
HDMI AV OUT
OUT
AV1
(TV)
AV4 I N
PB
RF
OUT
Reference
HDMI cable
AV2 ( EXT )
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AV
V OUT
OU
This unit’s rear panel
Note
≥If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 81) and
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)
≥You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)
RQT9306
67
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 68 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Additional connections
Connecting a television and VCR
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the
21-pin Scart cable.
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by
connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video
using RGB output on this unit.
Connect the unit directly to the television
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or
video cassette recorder to the television, video
signal will be affected by copyright protection
systems and the picture may not be shown
correctly.
≥When connecting to a television with a
built-in VCR
Connect to the input terminals on the television
side if there are both television and VCR input
terminals.
Required setting
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 63)
Connecting to a VCR with 21-pin Scart terminal
You can also connect with the AV2 terminal on this unit using the
21-pin Scart cable.
DO NOT
Television
VCR
This unit
Required setting
“AV2 Input” in the Setup menu (> 63)
Connecting an Analogue television and VCR
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
To the aerial
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Analogue television’s rear panel
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
Audio/Video cable
(included)
1
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
5
Other connections
(> 8, 66)
Aerial cable
6
Cooling fan
RF
IN
PB
AV1
(TV)
AV4
V4 IN
I
RF
OUT
PR
OPTICAL
OUT
Y
DIGI AL AUDIO
DIGITAL
UDIO OUT
OU COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
AV2 (EXT)
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
AV OUT
This unit’s rear panel
Audio/Video cable
RF coaxial cable
4
2
3
RF coaxial cable
(included)
VHF/UHF
RF IN
RF OUT
VCR’s rear panel
RQT9306
68
R
L
AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 69 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Connecting a Digital television and VCR
≥Connect to terminals of the same colour.
To the aerial
Aerial cable
To household mains socket
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)
Digital television’s rear panel
Splitter
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN
R
L
VHF/UHF
RF IN
4
Aerial cable
1
5
Other connections
(> 8, 66)
RF
IN
RF
OUT
6
AV1
(TV)
PR
OPTICAL
DIGI AL AUDIO
DIGITAL
UDIO OUT
OU COMPONENT
(PCM/BITSTREAM)
VIDEO OUT
OUT
Y
PB
AV4
V4 IN
I
Aerial cable
AC mains lead
(included)
Connect only after all other
connections are complete.
Audio/Video cable
(included)
Cooling fan
AV2 (EXT)
AC IN
R-AUDIO-L
VIDEO
S VIDEO
AV OUT
This unit’s rear panel
Audio/Video cable
3
VHF/UHF
RF IN
R
L VIDEO OUT
AUDIO OUT
VCR’s rear panel
Reference
2
RF coaxial cable
(included)
RQT9306
69
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 70 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Frequently asked questions
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit
operations.
Set up
Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital
terrestrial broadcasts?
¾ You can use your current aerial. However, depending on the
area where you live, a new aerial may be necessary. Consult
your local TV aerial installer.
Can this unit receive or record High Definition
(HD) broadcasts?
¾ No, this unit cannot receive or record High Definition (HD)
broadcasts.
What equipment is necessary to play multi
channel surround sound?
¾ You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without
other equipment. You must connect this unit with an HDMI
cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder. (> 67)
Are the headphones and speakers directly
connected to the unit?
¾ You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through
the amplifier etc. (> 67)
The television has both S VIDEO IN terminal and
COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals. Which terminal
should I connect with?
¾ Connecting with the component video out terminal provides a
more vivid picture compared to connecting with the S Video out
terminal.
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector
compatible with progressive scan, connect through the
component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using
PAL mode that is compatible with progressive scan, we cannot
recommend progressive output as some flickering can occur.
(> 8, 66)
Is my television progressive output compatible?
¾ All Panasonic televisions that have 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480
(525)/60i · 60p input terminals are compatible. Consult the
manufacturer if you have another brand of television.
Disc
Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs bought in
another country?
¾ You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not
include “4” or “ALL”.
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information. (> Cover)
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a region
number be played?
¾ The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a
standard. You cannot play discs that do not have a region
number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to a
standard.
Please tell me about disc compatibility with this
unit.
¾ This unit records and plays DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and plays DVD-RW (DVD
Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to
a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are
possible). (> 10–11)
¾ This unit also records and plays high speed recording
compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW
discs.
RQT9306
70
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW
compatibility with this unit.
¾ This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded
in one of the following standards: CD-DA, Video CD, DivX,
MP3, WMA and still pictures (JPEG). (> 11, 12)
¾ You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.
Recording
Can I record from a commercially purchased
video cassette or DVD?
¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy
protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video
format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit
be played on other equipment?
¾ You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players
after finalising the disc on this unit. However, depending on the
condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.
¾ If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible
equipment.
Can a digital audio signal from this unit be
recorded to other equipment?
¾ You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD,
change the “Digital Audio Output” settings to the following in the
Setup menu. (> 62)
– PCM Down Conversion: On
– Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is
permitted and the recording equipment is compatible with a
sampling frequency of 48 kHz.
¾ You cannot record MP3 or WMA signals.
(Analogue broadcast only)
Can I switch to bilingual broadcast during
recording?
¾ With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].
(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”) (> 28)
¾ With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you
cannot. Change before recording with “Bilingual Audio
Selection” in the Setup menu. (> 62)
Can I high speed copy to a disc?
¾ Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to
“On” before recording the programme.)
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies. (> 45)
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 71 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
TV Guide
USB
Is it possible to programme a recording, with a
start and end time that are different from the TV
Guide system?
What can or cannot be done using the USB port
on this unit?
¾ You can manually change the start and end time of
programmes in the Timer Recording menu. (> 23)
If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the start
recording time and finish recording time can be set to a margin
of up to 10 minutes. (> 61, Start Recording Time, Finish
Recording Time)
Can I receive TV Guide system data via a
connected digital satellite receiver or a Set Top
Box?
¾ No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with
digital satellite receivers or Set Top Boxes, please use your
unit’s manual timer programming. (> 23)
How can I cancel a Timer programming?
¾ You can play DivX, MP3, WMA or still picture (JPEG) files on a
USB memory. (> 30)
¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the
HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 51)
¾ You can copy MP3 or WMA files on a USB memory to the HDD.
(> 52)
¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the
HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 49)
¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB
memory.
¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory
cannot be formatted on this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 11)
Music
What will happen if I try to record the same CD
multiple times?
¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then
press [DELETE ¢]. (> 25)
¾ New album will be made following the existing album.
What happens when I unplug the unit from the
household mains socket?
¾ The TV Guide data will not be updated.
¾ If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for
a longer period of time, the TV Guide data will be lost.
¾ Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the
disc or USB memory?
¾ No, you cannot.
TV Channels
Please tell me about TV reception channels.
¾ Channel indications are different from the actual TV channels.
Refer to the following list of TV Reception Channels.
List of TV Reception Channels
Tuner
System
PAL–B
DVB–T
Channel
Coverage
Australia
Analogue
Australia
Digital
VHF
UHF
CATV
0–12
28–69
6–12
27–69
45 MHz to
470 MHz
–
Abkhazian:
6566
Afar:
6565
Afrikaans:
6570
Albanian:
8381
Amharic:
6577
Arabic:
6582
Armenian:
7289
Assamese:
6583
Aymara:
6589
Azerbaijani:
6590
Bashkir:
6665
Basque:
6985
Bengali; Bangla:
6678
Bhutani:
6890
Bihari:
6672
Breton:
6682
Bulgarian:
6671
Burmese:
7789
Byelorussian: 6669
Cambodian:
7577
Catalan:
Chinese:
Corsican:
Croatian:
Czech:
Danish:
Dutch:
English:
Esperanto:
Estonian:
Faroese:
Fiji:
Finnish:
French:
Frisian:
Galician:
Georgian:
German:
Greek:
Greenlandic:
Guarani:
6765
9072
6779
7282
6783
6865
7876
6978
6979
6984
7079
7074
7073
7082
7089
7176
7565
6869
6976
7576
7178
Gujarati:
Hausa:
Hebrew:
Hindi:
Hungarian:
Icelandic:
Indonesian:
Interlingua:
Irish:
Italian:
Japanese:
Javanese:
Kannada:
Kashmiri:
Kazakh:
Kirghiz:
Korean:
Kurdish:
Laotian:
Latin:
Latvian, Lettish:
7185
7265
7387
7273
7285
7383
7378
7365
7165
7384
7465
7487
7578
7583
7575
7589
7579
7585
7679
7665
7686
Lingala:
Lithuanian:
Macedonian:
Malagasy:
Malay:
Malayalam:
Maltese:
Maori:
Marathi:
Moldavian:
Mongolian:
Nauru:
Nepali:
Norwegian:
Oriya:
Pashto, Pushto:
Persian:
Polish:
Portuguese:
Punjabi:
Quechua:
7678
7684
7775
7771
7783
7776
7784
7773
7782
7779
7778
7865
7869
7879
7982
8083
7065
8076
8084
8065
8185
Rhaeto-Romance:
8277
Romanian:
8279
Russian:
8285
Samoan:
8377
Sanskrit:
8365
Scots Gaelic: 7168
Serbian:
8382
Serbo-Croatian: 8372
Shona:
8378
Sindhi:
8368
Singhalese:
8373
Slovak:
8375
Slovenian:
8376
Somali:
8379
Spanish:
6983
Sundanese:
8385
Swahili:
8387
Swedish:
8386
Tagalog:
8476
Tajik:
8471
Tamil:
Tatar:
Telugu:
Thai:
Tibetan:
Tigrinya:
Tonga:
Turkish:
Turkmen:
Twi:
Ukrainian:
Urdu:
Uzbek:
Vietnamese:
Volapük:
Welsh:
Wolof:
Xhosa:
Yiddish:
Yoruba:
Zulu:
8465
8484
8469
8472
6679
8473
8479
8482
8475
8487
8575
8582
8590
8673
8679
6789
8779
8872
7473
8979
9085
Reference
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.
RQT9306
71
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 72 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Messages
On the television
Authorisation Error.
≥You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX) (> 31)
Cannot finish recording completely.
Copy-protect signal was detected.
≥The programme was copy-protected.
Disc is full, or maximum number of titles are
recorded. Cannot finish recording completely.
≥The HDD or disc may be full.
≥The maximum number of programme has been exceeded. (> 20)
≥[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.] (> 18, 39, 57)
≥Use a new disc.
Cannot record.
Maximum number of titles exceeded.
Cannot playback.
TV system is different from the setting.
To playback, please change the TV System in
Setup.
≥You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV
system currently selected on the unit.
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (> 63)
Cannot play on this unit.
≥You tried to play a non-compatible image. (> 12)
No Disc
≥The disc may be upside down.
No folders.
≥There is no compatible folder in this unit. (> 12)
Not enough space in the copy destination.
≥Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (> 18, 39, 43, 57)
≥Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination
Capacity:” is not exceeded. (> 48, 51, 53)
This is a non-recordable disc.
≥The disc may be dirty or scratched. (> 13)
≥The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalised
DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW. (> 10)
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW. (> 57)
≥You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the
HDD and then copy to the disc.
Unable to format.
This disc is not formatted properly.
Format it using DVD Management
in FUNCTION MENU.
Not enough space on HDD. Space of 4 hours
( in SP mode ) is necessary.
Maximum number of titles is recorded on HDD.
Please delete unwanted titles.
RQT9306
72
≥[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are
greater than 499.
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD. (> 18)
Rental Expired.
≥The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX) (> 31)
$
≥The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 73 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
On the unit’s display
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.
DVD 
(“∑” stands for a number.)
≥The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.
GUIDE
≥TV Guide data is being downloaded. (> 64)
HARD ERR§
≥If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
NoERAS
≥You cannot delete items on this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
NoREAD
≥The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 13)
≥This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (> 5)
NoWRIT
≥You cannot write to this disc.
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.
PLEASE WAIT§
≥There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its
recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the
message disappears.
PROG FULL§
≥There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes. (> 25)
REMOVE
≥The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.
SP 35:50
LP 151h
“SP”, “LP” and the
numbers are examples.
≥Available space on the HDD or disc.
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is
displayed when over 100 hours are available.
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151 hours”.
SW-DL
≥The unit is performing a software update. (> 64)
≥You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)
that has been recorded on other equipment.
Format the disc to use it.
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted. (> 57)
UNSUPPORT§
≥You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. (> 10–11)
≥You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory. (> 11)
F74
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
F75
≥The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.
U59
≥The unit is hot.
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.
U61
≥(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or copy. This
is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not broken. Once the
display clears you can use the unit again.
U76
≥HDMI cannot be output because this unit is connected to a model that does not support copyright protection.
U80
U81
U99
≥The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode.
Now press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.
U88
≥(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while recording,
playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again. (> 74)
H or F
≥There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s condition.)
≥Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the following.
(> 74–79)
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the dealer. Inform
the dealer of the service number when requesting service.
X HOLD
≥The Child Lock function is activated.
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears. (> 65)
§
The message are alternately displayed.
Reference
UNFORMAT
§
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more than 5
seconds. (> 64)
RQT9306
73
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 74 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Troubleshooting guide
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:
≥Regular disc rotating sounds.
≥Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.
≥Image disturbance during search.
≥Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting breaks.
≥Operations are slow to respond when “Power Save” is set to “On”.
≥Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again
using a Panasonic disc.)
≥The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.
(Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)
≥When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected
sound.
Power
No power.
The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].
¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active
household mains socket. (> 8, 68, 69)
The unit switches to standby mode.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the
main unit to turn the unit on.
The power is turned off automatically.
¾ If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV
with an HDMI cable, this unit will be automatically set to
standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode. (> 36)
1 second. There will be a slight difference between the time
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual 1 hour
elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes
56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.
“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be
ejected.
¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following
to eject the disc.
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on
the main unit for about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly
switched to standby.
2 While the unit is off, press and hold [∫] and [CH W] on the
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the
disc.
TV screen and video
Television reception worsens after connecting
the unit.
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between
the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal
booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved
by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.
The digital channel information or control panel
does not appear.
¾ If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)
with the “Intelligent Auto Standby” setting activated on the TV,
when switching the TV input, the unit will be automatically
turned to standby. For details please read the operating
instructions of the TV.
¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen
Messages” in the Setup menu. (> 62)
¾ The digital channel information will not appear during playback
or recording.
¾ Analogue broadcasts do not support the digital channel
information.
¾ The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV
supporting “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 37)
Displays
Teletext and teletext closed caption are not
displayed on the TV screen.
This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.
¾ This unit does not support teletext and teletext closed caption.
The display is dim.
¾ Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu. (> 62)
The grey background does not appear.
¾ Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu. (> 62)
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.
¾ Set the clock. (> 64)
The time recorded on the disc and the available
time shown do not add up.
The displayed time of this unit is different from
the actual recording time or MP3/WMA recording
time.
¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times.
¾ Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or
+RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It
does not increase if other titles are deleted.
¾ Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R
DL, +R or +R DL, there is no increase in disc space.
¾ More disc space than the actual recording time is used after
recording or editing the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200
times or more.
¾ While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.
The clock is not correct.
¾ Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time
correction function may not work. In this case, “Automatic” is
automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting
does not work, set the time manually. (> 64)
RQT9306
74
Compared to the actual recorded time, the
elapsed time displayed is less.
(Only when recording in NTSC)
¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the
number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to
Screen size is wrong.
¾ Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does
not have that function, set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to
“Off”. (> 54)
¾ Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu. (> 63)
¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to
“16:9” in the Setup menu. (> 63)
The recorded title’s screen size is wrong.
¾ Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for
Recording” to “4:3”. (> 61)
¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the
following cases.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.
– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.
– If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in
the Setup menu.
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same
aspect, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the
“Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. (> 61)
– By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a
chance that the recording will be made using the wrong
aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when
recording. (> 61)
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to
your television’s operating instructions.
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 75 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Picture does not appear during timer recording.
¾ Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off.
To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the
unit on.
The screen changes automatically.
¾ When “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On”, the
display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if
there is no operation for 5 minutes or more. (> 62) Press [OK]
to return to the previous screen.
There is a lot of after-image when playing video.
¾ Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 54)
When playing DVD-Video using progressive
output, one part of the picture momentarily
appears to be doubled up.
¾ Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is
caused by the editing method or material used on DVD-Video,
but should be corrected if you use interlace output. (> 54)
There is no apparent change in picture quality
when adjusted with the Picture menu in the onscreen menus.
¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be
distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
¾ If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High
Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you can only record either the main
or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for
High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”. (> 61)
Cannot switch audio.
¾ You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.
– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is
selected.
– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP
Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (> 62)
– When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default
setting is “On”). (> 61)
¾ The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an
HDMI cable. You cannot switch the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set
to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using
audio cables. (> 62, 67)
¾ There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of
how the disc was created.
Operation
¾ The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.
Cannot operate the television.
The remote control doesn’t work.
The images from this unit do not appear on the
television.
Picture is distorted.
¾ Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be
operated even if you change the code. (> 65)
¾ The remote control and main unit are using different codes.
Change the code on the remote control. (> 64)
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated
number button at the same time for
more than 5 seconds.
¾ Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT
terminal, S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT
terminals or HDMI terminal on this unit. (> 8, 66, 67, 68, 69)
¾ Make sure that the television’s input setting is correct.
¾ Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is
not progressive compatible. Press and hold [∫] and [1] (PLAY)
on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds to
cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.
¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used
by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [∫] and
[< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The
system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (> 63)
¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that
matches with this unit’s TV system.
¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (> 4)
¾ You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s
remote control signal sensor during operation. (> 4)
¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.
¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that
may be subject to sunlight exposure.
¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again
after changing the batteries. (> 64)
¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after
changing the batteries. (> 65)
¾ The child lock function is activated. (> 65)
The unit is on but cannot be operated.
¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor
reception or unfavourable weather conditions.
¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear
briefly between recorded titles in the following situations:
– between titles recorded with different recording modes.
– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.
– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.
– between playlist chapters.
Sound
No sound.
Low volume.
Distorted sound.
Cannot hear the desired audio type.
¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings.
Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected
one. (> 8, 62, 63, 66, 67, 68, 69)
¾ Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (> 28)
¾ Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)
¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are
connected with HDMI cables.
Reduce the number of connected devices.
¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is
output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.
¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable,
set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” in the Setup
menu. (> 63)
¾ Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected
properly. (> 15, 16)
¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.
¾ The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to
disappear.
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.
Reset the unit as follows:
1 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on
the main unit for about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly
switched to standby.
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one
minute, then reconnect it.
2 Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still
cannot be operated, consult the dealer.
Cannot eject disc.
¾ The unit is recording.
¾ The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and
hold [∫] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about
5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not
work. Cancel the Child Lock function. (> 65)
Reference
The picture is distorted during play, or video will
not play correctly.
RQT9306
75
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 76 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Troubleshooting guide
Cannot tune channels.
Cannot download channel presets from the
television.
Timer recording does not stop even when [∫] is
pressed.
¾ Check the connections. (> 8, 68, 69)
¾ You must connect to a VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3 or later)
compatible TV with a HDMI cable to download channel presets.
¾ If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while
“Power Save” is set to “Off” in the Setup menu (Quick Start
mode), you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.
Startup is slow.
The timer programme remains even after
recording finishes.
¾ Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the Setup menu. (> 64)
If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)
with the “Standby Power Save” setting activated on the TV,
even with “Power Save” set to “Off”, when the TV is in Standby
mode, the unit may take some time to startup.
¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:
– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.
– The clock is not set.
– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is
connected.
– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.
Recording, timer recording and
copying
Cannot record.
Cannot copy.
¾ You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be
recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto. (> 10)
¾ The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R]
[+R]DL] [+RW] (> 57)
¾ The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the
disc is protected with DVD Management. (> 56)
¾ Some programmes have limitations on the number of times
they can be recorded (CPRM). (> 81)
¾ You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the
number of titles has reached its limit. Delete unwanted titles or
use a new disc. (> 18, 39, 57)
¾ You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this
unit.
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.
¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy.
Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy. (> 18,
39, 57)
– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will
copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire
disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode
recording is necessary).
– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be
copied has exceeded 499.
¾ You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you
can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.
¾ Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVDVideo format), +R, +R DL and +RW you may be unable to
record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty
times.
¾ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL
and +RW recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other
Panasonic DVD Recorders.
¾ This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes
can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with
both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.
¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected.
Cannot record from external equipment.
¾ Check that the connection is correct. (> 22, 68, 69)
¾ Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.
Timer recording does not work properly.
¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme
times overlap. Correct the programme. (> 25)
¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer
icon “F” in the timer recording list is not on.) (> 24)
¾ Set the clock. (> 64)
¾ The programme information in the TV Guide system may not be
correct. It is recommended to modify the start and end times to
allow a margin of a few minutes. (> 23)
RQT9306
76
¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.
A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.
¾ If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the
household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may
be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or
use a new disc. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost
programmes or discs. (> 57)
The programme name and the recorded title do
not match.
¾ There was a programme change after timer recording was set
but the recorded title still has the old programme name.
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc. disc using the high
speed mode.
¾ When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to
“On” in the Setup menu. (The default setting is “On”). (> 61)
¾ In the following cases, high speed mode does not work, even if
the titles were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to
“On”.
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings
5 hours or longer)” mode.
– [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in 16:9 aspect.
– [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode
or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode.
¾ [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD
recorders with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then
copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or
+RW discs with high-speed copy.
When copying, it takes a long time even when
high speed mode is selected.
¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if
the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum
speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.
¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.
¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours
when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not
compatible with EP ( 8Hours ) mode recording.
An unusually loud sound is coming from the
rotating DVD-R, etc.
¾ When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL,
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound
of the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is
not a problem.
The DV automatic recording function does not
work.
¾ If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted,
check the connections and DV equipment settings. (> 22)
¾ You cannot start recording until the images from the DV
equipment appear on the television.
¾ Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes
on the tape in the DV equipment are not successive.
¾ Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may
not operate properly.
¾ The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV
tape. (> 22)
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Play
Play fails to start even when [1] (PLAY) is
pressed.
Play starts but then stops immediately.
¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (> 13)
¾ The disc is dirty. (> 13)
¾ You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.
(> 10–11)
¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the
equipment used for recording.
¾ You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that
was recorded to DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD
Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to
copyright protection.
¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP ( 8Hours )” mode, play
may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with
DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP ( 6Hours )” mode. (> 61)
¾ You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.
¾ If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you
purchased it. (DivX) (> 31)
¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages
are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.
Audio and video momentarily pause.
¾ This occurs between playlist chapters.
¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles
on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),
+R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high
speed mode.
¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.
¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the
unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in
the same way as a normal programme. However, video and
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching
layers. (> 10)
DVD-Video is not played.
¾ You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change
this setting. (> 61)
¾ Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is
not defective. (> Cover)
Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be
selected.
¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc.
¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the
soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus
to make changes. (> 15)
No subtitles.
¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.
¾ Turn the subtitles on and select “Text” or the subtitle number.
(> 54)
Angle cannot be changed.
¾ Angles can only be changed during scenes where different
angles are recorded.
You have forgotten your ratings password.
You want to cancel the ratings level.
¾ The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc
tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive,
then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit
at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on
the unit’s display).
Quick View does not work.
The Video CD picture does not display properly.
¾ When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV
System” in the Setup menu. (> 63)
¾ When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture
cannot be displayed correctly during search.
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.
¾ These functions do not work with finalised discs.
¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings
are different from the title recorded on the disc. (> 63)
It takes time before play starts.
¾ This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)
Picture stops.
¾ Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)
Cannot see the beginning of the title played.
¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI
cable)
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you
may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the
picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the
beginning of the title.
Edit
Available disc space does not increase even after
deleting a title.
¾ Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVDR, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL. (> 18)
¾ Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is
deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW. The disc
space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.
Cannot edit.
¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available
space.
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (> 18)
Cannot format.
¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.
(> 13)
¾ You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in
this unit. (> 10–11)
Cannot create chapters.
Cannot mark the start point or the end point
during “Partial Delete” operation.
¾ The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when
you turn it off or remove the disc. The information is not written
if there is an interruption to the power before this.
¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures.
¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You
cannot set an end point before a start point.
Cannot delete chapters.
¾ When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine
Chapters” to make the chapter longer. (> 39)
Cannot create a playlist.
Reference
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 77 ページ
¾ You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title
also includes still pictures. Select them individually.
¾ This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.
¾ This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.
The resume play function does not work.
¾ Memorized positions are cancelled when
– press [∫] several times.
– open the disc tray.
– [CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the unit.
– if a recording or timer recording was executed.
RQT9306
77
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 78 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Troubleshooting guide
Music
TV Guide
Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.
The TV Guide System does not receive any data.
¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS
restrictions, they will not be copied.
¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA
specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.
¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.
¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (> 64)
¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the
TV Guide system may not be able to receive any data.
“No Data” is displayed for some or all stations.
ID3 tag of a MP3 file or WMA tag of a WMA file is
not completely displayed.
¾ Only the track name ([HDD] [USB]) and artist name ([HDD]) can
be displayed with this unit.
Still pictures
The TV Guide information is not displayed
properly.
Cannot display DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.
¾ There was a programme change.
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV
Guide system provider or station provider.
¾ Programme information about analogue broadcasts is not
displayed.
¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copying.
Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.
¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as Progressive
JPEG etc., may not playback. (> 12)
USB
The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.
¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert
again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the
unit again.
¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (> 13)
¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not
compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory
may be damaged.) (> 11, 12)
¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file
extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (> 12)
¾ Turn off and then turn on the unit again.
¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a
USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 11)
¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB
memory may not be recognized by this unit.
RQT9306
78
¾ Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.
¾ Analogue broadcasts are not supported by the TV Guide
system.
¾ Programme the Timer recording manually or via G-CODE.
(> 23)
The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.
¾ The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to
the interruption.
¾ The programme information may be incomplete.
The TV Guide data is not updated.
¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly.
¾ Check whether “Off” is set under “TV Guide Download in
Standby” and change the setting in the Setup menu. (> 64)
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 79 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Digital broadcast
Digital broadcasts cannot be received.
¾ Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.
¾ The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station,
or the direction of the aerial may have changed due to strong
winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV
aerial installer.
After DVB Auto Setup only some or no DVB
channels are found.
¾ Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.
¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/
installed by a licenced installer that should comply with
Australian Standard AS1417.1.
If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a
combined VHF/UHF aerial should be adequate. Outside this
area, separate VHF and UHF aerials provide superior reception
performance. (> 8)
¾ If you live in a unit or apartment, check to ensure the Master
Antenna TV (MATV) system is designed for analogue and DVBT reception. Please consult your body corporate.
Picture regularly breaks up on some channels.
“No Signal” message is displayed.
¾ Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength”
are displayed in red or constantly changing, check aerial. If
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer. (> 60)
¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/
installed by a licenced installer that should comply with
Australian Standard AS1417.1. (> 8)
¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household
appliances such as light switches, fridges etc. may cause
picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality
quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and
antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.
¾ Check aerial connection.
¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the
Setup menu. (> 59)
The operation on this unit (music playback etc.)
is interrupted.
¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press
buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA
Link functions.
To reset this unit
To return all the settings other than the main ones
to the factory preset
¾ Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the
settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and clock
settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled. (> 64)
¾ Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the
settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, region
settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings password,
remote control code, return to the factory presets. The timer
recording programmes are also cancelled. (> 64)
¾ Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the
Auto-Setup screen appears. All the settings except for the
ratings level, ratings password, clock settings and remote
control code return to the factory preset. The timer recording
programmes are also cancelled.
To reset the ratings level settings
¾ While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select
the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on
the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.
To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the
safety devices being activated
¾ Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The
settings remain.)
Other
After performing an update, you can no longer
receive broadcasts.
¾ Depending on the content of the update, some settings may
have returned to the preset values. Fix the settings again.
Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or
all channels.
¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant
lighting storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may
cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort
momentarily.
¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical
appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy”
ignition system.
VIERA Link
¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is
displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit
is set to On.
¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (> 63)
¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.
¾ Some functions may not work if depending on the version of
“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit supports
“HDAVI Control 4” functions.
¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was
changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was
removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”
may not work.
In this case, perform the following operations.
1 When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the
power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.
2 Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”
function to off, and then set to on again. (For more
information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)
3 Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit,
and after this unit’s screen is displayed check that “HDAVI
Control” is working.
Reference
VIERA Link doesn’t work.
RQT9306
79
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 80 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Specifications
Recording system
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format
+R
+R DL (Double Layer)
+RW
Recordable discs
DVD-RAM:
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)
DVD-R:
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): 2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)
DVD-RW:
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
+R:
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)
+R DL:
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)
+RW:
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)
Recording time
Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours
Maximum Approx. 441 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)
XP: Approx. 55 hours, SP: Approx. 110 hours
LP: Approx. 221 hours, EP: Approx. 331 hours/441 hours
Playable discs
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3§1, WMA§1, JPEG§1, DivX§1
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format,
MP3§1, WMA§1, JPEG§1, DivX§1
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD
CD-R/CD-RW : CD-DA§1, Video CD§1, MP3§1, WMA§1,
JPEG§1, DivX§1
Internal HDD capacity
250 GB
Optical pick-up
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)
LASER specification
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)
Wave length:
CD
780 nm wave length
DVD
662 nm wave length
Laser power:
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection
Audio
Recording system:
Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)
Audio in:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)
Input level:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Input impedance:
More than 10 k≠
Audio out:
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)
Output level:
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz
Output impedance:
Less than 1 k≠
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)
HDMI Output
19 pin type A: 1 pc
HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour)
≥This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.
RQT9306
80
Video
Video system:
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)
Recording system:
Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 ≠, termination
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 ≠, termination
Television system
Tuner system
Channel coverage
PAL–B
Australia
VHF: 0 to 12
UHF: 28 to 69
CATV: 45 MHz to 470 MHz
DVB–T
Australia
VHF: 6 to 12
UHF: 27 to 69
RF converter output:
DV input
Not provided
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc
USB port
Type A : 1 pc
USB standard:
USB 2.0 High Speed
Format:
FAT16, FAT32
Video (SD Video)§2
Codec:
MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)
File Format:
SD-Video format conforming
Others
Region code:
Operating temperature:
Operating humidity range:
Power supply:
Power consumption:
Dimensions (WkHkD):
Mass:
‚4
5 oC to 40 oC
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz
Approx. 36 W
430 mmk59 mmk326 mm
Approx. 4.2 kg
Power consumption in standby mode:
Approx. 2 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)
Approx. 15 W (“Power Save” is set to “Off”)
Note
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
§1
Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.
§2
Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB to
HDD or DVD-RAM disc.
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVDRAM disc, the playback is possible.
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 81 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Glossary
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.
Decoder
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This
is called decoding.
Deep Colour
This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology
that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when
connected to a compatible TV. You can enjoy exceptionally rich,
natural-looking colours, with smooth, detailed gradation and minimal
colour banding. [A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep
Colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not
support Deep Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate
output to suit the connected TV.]
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality
that maintains a relatively small file size.
Dolby Digital
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information
can be recorded on one disc using this method.
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default
audio.
Down-mixing
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then
only output the front two channels.
Drive
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD) and disc
(DVD). These perform the reading and writing of data.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are
possible.
Dynamic range
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest
level of sound before distortion occurs.
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.
Film and video
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable
method of progressive output.
Film:
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.
Video:
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL
discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).
Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or
animation.
Finalise
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,
etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can
finalise DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R
DL on this unit.
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for
recording again.
Folder
This is a place on the hard disk or disc where groups of data are
stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where
still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.
Formatting
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM
recordable on recording equipment.
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),
+RW and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.
Frames and fields
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.
u
Frame
r
Field
Field
≥A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but
picture quality is generally better.
≥A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but
there is no blurring.
HDD (Hard disk drive)
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports highdefinition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high
definition compatible television is required.
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering
the degree of compression.
LPCM (Linear PCM)
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on
CDs.
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.
SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be
copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)
An audio compression method that compresses audio to
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of
audio quality.
Pan&Scan/Letterbox
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.
Pan & Scan:
The sides are cut off so the picture
fills the screen.
Letterbox:
Black bands appear at the top and
bottom of the picture so the picture
itself appears in an aspect ratio of
16:9.
Playback control (PBC)
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and
information with menus.
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)
Progressive/Interlace
The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are
called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.
Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p
input terminals are progressive compatible.
Reference
Bitstream
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)
before it is decoded into its various channels.
RQT9306
81
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 82 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Glossary
Protection
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or
deletion protection.
RGB
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.
Sampling frequency
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the
original sound.
Signal Quality
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered
values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the
quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels
you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time
(day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial,
etc.
Thumbnail
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display
multiple pictures in the form of a list.
WMA
WMA is a compression format developed by Microsoft Corporation.
It achieves the same sound quality as MP3 with a file size that is
smaller than that of MP3.
1080i
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic
and rich image.
1080p
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Gracenote® End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE
TERMS BELOW.
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote
(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc
and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”)
from online servers or embedded databases (collectively,
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use
Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions
of this application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal noncommercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS 2.0 + Digital
Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol
are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for
statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote
service.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Plays DivX® video
DivX® is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under
license.
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.
82
Gracenote® Proprietary Legends
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©
2000–2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000–
2009 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:
#6,304,523.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate
if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree
to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote
Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will
Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its
rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.
720p
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.
RQT9306
Gracenote® Corporate Description
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music
recognition technology and related content delivery.
For more information visit www.gracenote.com.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of
Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of
such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a
license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and
third parties.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are
licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or
implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from
the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that
functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be
uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new
enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may
provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any
time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL
BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 83 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
3DQDVRQLF:DUUDQW\
7KH SURGXFW LV ZDUUDQWHG IRU PRQWKV IURP WKH GDWH RI SXUFKDVH 6XEMHFW WR WKH FRQGLWLRQV RI WKLV ZDUUDQW\
3DQDVRQLFRULW
V$XWKRULVHG6HUYLFH&HQWUHZLOOSHUIRUPQHFHVVDU\VHUYLFHRQWKHSURGXFWZLWKRXWFKDUJHIRUSDUWV
RUODERXULILQWKHRSLQLRQRI3DQDVRQLFWKHSURGXFWLVIRXQGWREHIDXOW\ZLWKLQWKHZDUUDQW\SHULRG
7KLV ZDUUDQW\ RQO\ DSSOLHV WR 3DQDVRQLF SURGXFWV SXUFKDVHG LQ $XVWUDOLD DQG VROG E\ 3DQDVRQLF $XVWUDOLD RU LWV
$XWKRULVHG 'LVWULEXWRUV RU 'HDOHUV DQG RQO\ ZKHUH WKH SURGXFWV DUH XVHG DQG VHUYLFHG ZLWKLQ $XVWUDOLD RU LW
V
WHUULWRULHV:DUUDQW\FRYHURQO\DSSOLHVWRVHUYLFHFDUULHGRXWE\D3DQDVRQLF$XWKRULVHG6HUYLFH&HQWUHDQGRQO\
LIYDOLGSURRIRISXUFKDVHLVSUHVHQWHGZKHQZDUUDQW\VHUYLFHLVUHTXHVWHG
7KLV ZDUUDQW\ RQO\ DSSOLHV LI WKH SURGXFW KDV EHHQ LQVWDOOHG DQG XVHG LQ DFFRUGDQFH ZLWK WKH PDQXIDFWXUHU¶V
UHFRPPHQGDWLRQVDVQRWHGLQWKHRSHUDWLQJLQVWUXFWLRQVXQGHUQRUPDOXVHDQGUHDVRQDEOHFDUHLQWKHRSLQLRQRI
3DQDVRQLF 7KH ZDUUDQW\ FRYHUV QRUPDO GRPHVWLF XVH RQO\ DQG GRHV QRW FRYHU GDPDJH PDOIXQFWLRQ RU IDLOXUH
UHVXOWLQJ IURP XVH RI LQFRUUHFW YROWDJHV LQFRUUHFW LQVWDOODWLRQ DFFLGHQW PLVXVH QHJOHFW EXLOGXS RI GLUW RU GXVW
DEXVHPDODGMXVWPHQWRIFXVWRPHUFRQWUROVPDLQVVXSSO\SUREOHPVWKXQGHUVWRUPDFWLYLW\LQIHVWDWLRQE\LQVHFWV
RU YHUPLQ WDPSHULQJ RU UHSDLU E\ XQDXWKRULVHG SHUVRQV LQFOXGLQJ XQDXWKRULVHG DOWHUDWLRQV H[SRVXUH WR
DEQRUPDOO\FRUURVLYHFRQGLWLRQVRUDQ\IRUHLJQREMHFWRUPDWWHUKDYLQJHQWHUHGWKHSURGXFW
7KLVZDUUDQW\GRHVQRWFRYHUWKHIROORZLQJLWHPVXQOHVVWKHIDXOWRUGHIHFWH[LVWHGDWWKHWLPHRISXUFKDVH
D9LGHRRU$XGLR7DSHV
H&DELQHW3DUW E'9'9LGHR%OX5D\RU5HFRUGDEOH'LVFV I,QIRUPDWLRQVWRUHGRQWKH+DUG'LVN'ULYH
F6'FDUGVRU86%GHYLFHV
J8VHUUHSODFHDEOH%DWWHULHV
G9LGHRRUDXGLR+HDGVIURPZHDUDQGWHDULQQRUPDOXVH
6RPHSURGXFWVPD\EHVXSSOLHGZLWKHWKHUQHWFRQQHFWLRQKDUGZDUH7KHZDUUDQW\LVOLPLWHGRQVXFKSURGXFWVDQG
ZLOOQRWFRYHU
D,QWHUQHW FRQQHFWLRQUHODWHGSUREOHPV
E $FFHVVIHHVRUFKDUJHVLQFXUUHGIRUWKHLQWHUQHW
F WKHXVHRILQFRPSDWLEOHVRIWZDUHRUVRIWZDUHQRWVSHFLILFDOO\VWLSXODWHGLQWKHSURGXFWRSHUDWLRQVPDQXDODQG
G DQ\LQGLUHFWRUFRQVHTXHQWLDOFRVWVDVVRFLDWHGZLWKWKHLQFRUUHFWXVHRUPLVXVHRIWKHKDUGZDUHLWVFRQQHFWLRQ
WRWKHLQWHUQHWRUDQ\RWKHUGHYLFH
,IZDUUDQW\VHUYLFHLVUHTXLUHG\RXVKRXOG
x 7HOHSKRQH 3DQDVRQLF¶V &XVWRPHU &DUH &HQWUH RQ RU YLVLW RXU ZHEVLWH DQG XVH WKH 6HUYLFH &HQWUH
/RFDWRUIRUWKHQDPHDGGUHVVRIWKHQHDUHVW$XWKRULVHG6HUYLFH&HQWUH
x 6HQG RU EULQJ WKH SURGXFW WR D 3DQDVRQLF $XWKRULVHG 6HUYLFH &HQWUH WRJHWKHU ZLWK \RXU SURRI RI SXUFKDVH
UHFHLSW DV D SURRI RI SXUFKDVH GDWH 3OHDVH QRWH WKDW IUHLJKW DQG LQVXUDQFH WR DQG RU IURP \RXU QHDUHVW
$XWKRULVHG6HUYLFH&HQWUHPXVWEHDUUDQJHGE\\RX
7KH ZDUUDQWLHV KHUHE\ FRQIHUUHG GR QRW H[WHQG WR DQG H[FOXGH DQ\ FRVWV DVVRFLDWHG ZLWK WKH LQVWDOODWLRQ GH
LQVWDOODWLRQ RU UHLQVWDOODWLRQ RI D SURGXFW LQFOXGLQJ FRVWV UHODWHG WR WKH PRXQWLQJ GHPRXQWLQJ RU UHPRXQWLQJ RI
DQ\ VFUHHQ DQG DQ\ RWKHU DQFLOODU\ DFWLYLWLHV GHOLYHU\ KDQGOLQJ IUHLJKWLQJ WUDQVSRUWDWLRQ RU LQVXUDQFH RI WKH
SURGXFWRUDQ\SDUWWKHUHRIRUUHSODFHPHQWRIDQGGRQRWH[WHQGWRDQGH[FOXGHDQ\GDPDJHRUORVVRFFXUULQJE\
UHDVRQRIGXULQJDVVRFLDWHGZLWKRUUHODWHGWRVXFKLQVWDOODWLRQGHLQVWDOODWLRQUHLQVWDOODWLRQRUWUDQVLW
3DQDVRQLF$XWKRULVHG6HUYLFH&HQWUHVDUHORFDWHGLQPDMRUPHWURSROLWDQDUHDVDQGPRVWUHJLRQDOFHQWUHVRI$XVWUDOLD
KRZHYHUFRYHUDJHZLOOYDU\GHSHQGDQWRQSURGXFW)RUDGYLFHRQH[DFW$XWKRULVHG6HUYLFH&HQWUHORFDWLRQVIRU\RXU
SURGXFW SOHDVH WHOHSKRQH RXU &XVWRPHU &DUH &HQWUH RQ RU YLVLW RXU ZHEVLWH DQG XVH WKH 6HUYLFH &HQWUH
/RFDWRU
8QOHVVRWKHUZLVHVSHFLILHGWRWKHFRQVXPHUWKHEHQHILWVFRQIHUUHGE\WKLVH[SUHVVZDUUDQW\DUHDGGLWLRQDOWRDOORWKHU
FRQGLWLRQV ZDUUDQWLHV JXDUDQWHHV ULJKWV DQG UHPHGLHV H[SUHVVHG RU LPSOLHG E\ WKH 7UDGH 3UDFWLFHV $FW DQG
VLPLODUFRQVXPHUSURWHFWLRQSURYLVLRQVFRQWDLQHGLQOHJLVODWLRQRIWKH6WDWHVDQG7HUULWRULHVDQGDOORWKHUREOLJDWLRQV
DQG OLDELOLWLHV RQ WKH SDUW RIWKH PDQXIDFWXUHU RU VXSSOLHU DQG QRWKLQJ FRQWDLQHG KHUHLQ VKDOO UHVWULFW RU PRGLI\ VXFK
0D\
ULJKWVUHPHGLHVREOLJDWLRQVRUOLDELOLWLHV
7+,6:$55$17<&$5'$1'7+(385&+$6('2&.(7256,0,/$53522)2)385&+$6(
6+28/'%(5(7$,1('%<7+(&86720(5$7$//7,0(6
,I\RXUHTXLUHDVVLVWDQFHUHJDUGLQJZDUUDQW\FRQGLWLRQVRUDQ\RWKHUHQTXLULHV
SOHDVHFRQWDFWRXU&XVWRPHU&DUH&HQWUHYLDWKH3DQDVRQLFZHEVLWHZZZSDQDVRQLFFRPDXRU
E\SKRQHRQ,ISKRQLQJLQSOHDVHHQVXUH\RXKDYH\RXURSHUDWLQJLQVWUXFWLRQVDYDLODEOH
3DQDVRQLF$XVWUDOLD3W\/LPLWHG
$&1$%1
/RFNHG%DJ)UHQFKV)RUHVW16:
54$
Reference
352),VVXH
RQT9306
83
DMREX79GN-RQT9306-L_eng.book 84 ページ
２００９年３月２４日　火曜日　午後２時３８分
Index
Adjust the audio quality
(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Adjust the picture quality
(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Album (Music)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Album (Still picture)
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Audio
Digital broadcast (DVB Multi Audio) . . . 55
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 24
AV2 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Channel
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 60
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 38
Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 61
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Cleaning
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Connection
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 68, 69
Amplifier, receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 67
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 66–69
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . 68, 69
Copy
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 39
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Delete
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 41
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 62, 63
Digital broadcast
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 14
DVB Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 62
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . 29, 32, 38, 42
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11
Display
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 14
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 30–31, 81
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DVB Multi Audio
Select audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Panasonic Corporation
Web Site: http://panasonic.net
Edit
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling discs to be played on other
equipment - Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
43
41
42
38
58
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 81
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 81
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . 20, 21
FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . 7, 35
G-CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Gracenote® database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
HDAVI Control . . . . . . . . 8, 36–37, 63, 67
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 63, 67, 81
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 32–33, 81
Language
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 81
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Menu
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30–31
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Mode
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Music on HDD
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Name
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 39
New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 62
Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 61
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 23–27
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 54
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 21
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61
Still picture
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Subtitle
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc
(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 23–27
Tuning
Analogue broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 26
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
USB
Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Supported formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 36–37, 63, 67
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 63, 81
Properties
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 42
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Protection
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
p
RQT9306-L
F0309ST0